JP2009254534A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of favorably improving the degree of attention of a game. <P>SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine is provided with a main control device 81 and a round display part RS and a first result display part AS controlled to emit lights by the main control device 81. The main control device 81 executes a win/failure lottery when the game ball enters an operation hole provided in a game area and the result of the win/failure lottery is displayed on the first result display part AS. When the result of the win/failure lottery is a jackpot result and a variable winning device provided in the game area is opened/closed, the number of opening/closing times in the occasion are displayed on the round display part RS. Even if the result of the win/failure lottery is not the jackpot result, the machine is set with a special failure result where the variable winning device is opened/closed and, when the variable winning device is opened/closed by getting the special failure result, the first result display part AS displays the information of the number of opening/closing times. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2010,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is known that includes a picture display device that displays a plurality of pictures on a display screen. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a game ball has passed through an operating port provided in the gaming area, a winning lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the big hit state, and the display of the variation of the picture is started. When the winning lottery is won, the special picture combination and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the big winning state. With the shift to the big hit state, for example, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in the game area is started, and a large amount of game balls are paid out.

  As an example of the variable display of patterns, a typical display in which three pattern rows are scrolled and displayed as a scroll will be described as an example. First, the variable display of each pattern row is started, and the two pattern rows are stopped and displayed. When a combination that can be a special pattern combination is stopped on the active line, reach is reached, and when the remaining display of the pattern block is stopped and the special combination is finally stopped, the flow shifts to a big hit state. It is common.

In addition, for example, there is a gaming machine that performs a lottery per specific and non-specific, and displays a combination of specific patterns in the case of a specific win, and finally stops and displays a combination of non-specific patterns in the case of non-specific. Yes (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, when winning per specific, the game goes to a gaming state in which the winning probability of the winning lottery is relatively high after the end of the jackpot state, and when winning per non-specific, the winning probability is relatively It does not shift to a gaming state that becomes higher.
JP 2003-071059 A

  However, in the case of a configuration in which the hit type and the combination of the final stop-displayed pattern are uniquely associated as described above, the player can visually recognize the final stop-displayed pattern so that the gaming state is a big hit state It is possible to clearly recognize whether or not to shift to. Then, there is a concern that the game content is unambiguous and hardly changes, leading to a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine, an act of illegally trying to receive a large amount of gaming balls by cheating on the variable pitching device even though the big hit state has not occurred is assumed. In such circumstances, if there is no indication to that effect on the gaming machine when shifting to the jackpot state, even if the game hall administrator sees the gaming machine, the jackpot state on the variable pitching device etc. It becomes impossible to judge whether the action corresponding to is normal or illegal.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but also occurs in other gaming machines in which a big hit state or the like is set as a gaming state.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of satisfactorily suppressing a decrease in gaming motivation.

  Hereinafter, effective means for solving the above-described problems will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

Means 1. A lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and a lottery mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high or low Lottery means (function to execute information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, function to execute variation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
A variable pitching means (variable winning device 32) provided in a game area where the game ball flows down and capable of switching between an open state in which the game ball flowing down is easy to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter;
An opening / closing control means (a function for executing a big prize opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for performing an opening / closing control for switching to the closed state after the variable pitching means is opened;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special game state winning, the number of times the variable pitching means is switched to the closed state after becoming the open state is a first predetermined number of times. A first transition means for shifting the gaming state to a first special gaming state in which the lottery mode in the lottery means becomes the high probability mode. A function of executing a gaming state transition process in a situation where the implicit 2R probability change flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81;
A result display unit (first result display unit AS) for displaying information on the lottery result of the lottery means at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
A switching number display part (round display part RS) for displaying information on the number of times of switching at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state, the first special correspondence information is displayed on the result display unit in a predetermined result display situation. The display of the result display unit is controlled as described above, and the switching is performed so that the first number of times information including the symbol corresponding to the first number of times is displayed on the switching number display unit in a predetermined number of times display situation. Information display control means for controlling the display of the number of times display section (function to execute various stop result setting processing, variable display time setting processing, variation end processing, and round display start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
With
The opening / closing control means sets the number of times of switching to the first number of times based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning and a predetermined special condition is satisfied. Special opening / closing control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable pitching means (a function of executing a special winning opening opening / closing process in a situation where a special out flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81),
When the variable pitching means is controlled to be opened and closed by the special opening and closing control means, the lottery mode by the lottery means is configured to maintain the lottery mode until then,
The information display control means prevents the occurrence of a display state in which the first special correspondence information is displayed on the result display unit in the result display situation based on the establishment of the special condition and the number of times Information including a symbol corresponding to the first number of times is displayed in the result display state while preventing a display state in which the first number of times information is displayed on the switching number display unit in the display state. Special display control means for performing display control so that it is displayed on at least one of the result display section or the switching number display section in the number display situation (a special out flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81). Functions to execute various stop result setting processing, variable display time setting processing, variation end processing, and round display start processing depending on the situation Gaming machine, characterized in that it comprises.

  In the gaming machine of the means 1, when the gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state, the first special correspondence information is displayed on the result display section in the result display situation, so that the game hall that has seen it is displayed. The manager can grasp the transition to the first special gaming state, and further, the information for the first number of times is displayed on the switching number display part in the number of times display situation, so that the management of the game hall that has seen it The person can grasp the number of times of opening and closing the variable pitching means.

  In this case, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special game state winning, if the predetermined special condition is satisfied, the variable pitching means is the same as in the first special game state. The opening / closing control is performed until the number of times of switching reaches the first number. Thereby, when opening and closing in the variable pitching means is performed for the first number of times, it is determined to the player whether it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or because the special condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to make predictions, and monotonization of the game is suppressed.

  In addition, when the special condition is satisfied, the lottery mode by the lottery means maintains the previous lottery mode, so that the advantage of the first special game state is ensured and the lottery is performed when the special condition is satisfied. Since the mode does not shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, the player is not disadvantaged by the establishment of the special condition in the configuration in which the monotonization of the game is suppressed as described above.

  However, when the variable pitching means is opened / closed based on the establishment of the special condition, the result display unit and the switching number display unit both display clearly different from the case of shifting to the first special game state. Then, the player sees the result display section and the switching number display section, so that the opening and closing of the variable pitching means does not correspond to the transition to the first special gaming state, but corresponds to the establishment of the special condition. It can be easily judged that there is. If it does so, the effect which suppresses the monotonization of the said game will lose | disappear or will be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the variable pitching means is opened / closed based on the establishment of the special condition, the information including the symbol corresponding to the first number of times is displayed in the result display unit in the result display situation or the number display situation. It may be displayed on at least one of the switching number display sections. As a result, even if the player sees the result display section and the switching number display section, the opening / closing of the variable entry means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the establishment of the special condition. It is possible to make it difficult to judge whether it is a thing.

  On the other hand, when the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the special condition, the display state in which the first special correspondence information is displayed on the result display unit in the result display situation does not occur, and the number of times is displayed. In the usage situation, a display state in which the first number of times information is displayed on the switching number display unit does not occur. Therefore, as described above, the game hall makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It becomes possible for the administrator of the system to be able to judge.

  Note that “a predetermined special condition is satisfied” includes a special lottery result in the lottery means or in a different lottery means.

  Mean 2. The special opening / closing control means controls opening / closing of the variable pitching means until the number of switching times reaches the first number based on the establishment of the special condition, and executes the first opening / closing mode of the opening / closing control. The gaming machine according to means 1, wherein the gaming machine is recognized as being identical to the state.

  According to the means 2, even when the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special game state winning, when the predetermined special condition is satisfied, the variable entry means is in the first special game state. In the same manner as described above, the opening / closing control is performed until the number of switching times reaches the first number. Furthermore, the aspect of the opening / closing control at that time is such an aspect that it is recognized that it is the same as the first opening / closing execution state that occurs when shifting to the first special gaming state. Thereby, when opening and closing in the variable pitching means is performed for the first number of times, it is determined to the player whether it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or because the special condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to make predictions, and monotonization of the game is suppressed.

Means 3. As the special gaming state winning, at least a first winning and a second winning are set,
The first transition means shifts the gaming state to the first special gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first winning,
Further, based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the second winning, until the variable pitching means or the variable pitching means different from the above is the second predetermined number of times of switching. Second transition means (a 15R probability change flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that shifts the gaming state to the second special gaming state where the second opening / closing execution state that is controlled to open / close by the opening / closing control means occurs at least. A function to execute the game state transition process in a situation where
The game according to means 2, wherein the first opening / closing execution state is set as a state in which entering of the game ball into the variable entry means is less likely to occur than in the second opening / closing execution state. Machine.

  According to the means 3, in the first opening / closing execution state and the second opening / closing execution state, the first opening / closing execution state and the opening / closing control mode are the same, in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable entry means. As can be appreciated, the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of special conditions. This makes it possible to relatively reduce the benefits that the player can obtain when opening and closing the variable pitching means based on the establishment of special conditions. Therefore, it is possible to open and close the variable pitching means based on the establishment of the special condition while suppressing the influence on the game ball exit rate.

  It should be noted that “the state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means” includes, for example, a configuration in which a single opening time is set short, and when the opening state is reached. The configuration that switches to the closed state based on the occurrence of the entrance of the open limit number of game balls includes a configuration in which the open limit number is set to be small.

  Further, instead of the configuration of the means 3, the following configuration may be applied. That is, it includes a launching unit (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area at a predetermined launch period in accordance with a launch operation by the player, and the opening / closing control unit further includes the variable entrance ball In the configuration in which the variable entry means is closed when the opening restriction period has elapsed when the means is in the open state, the opening restriction period in the first opening / closing execution state is shorter than the firing cycle. Thus, a configuration may be adopted in which the entry of the game ball does not substantially occur when the variable entry means is opened and closed based on the first opening / closing execution state and the establishment of the special condition.

  In addition, it includes a launching unit (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area at a predetermined launch period in accordance with a launch operation by the player, and the opening / closing control unit includes the variable entrance ball In the configuration in which the variable entry means is in the closed state when the closing condition of either the elapse of the opening restriction period or the entry of the opening restriction number of game balls is satisfied when the means is in the open state, The opening restriction period in the first opening / closing execution state is made shorter than the product of the firing period and the opening restriction number, so that the variable pitching means can be opened and closed based on the first opening / closing execution state and the special condition. It may be configured to make it difficult for game balls to enter.

  Means 4. The special display control means includes information including a symbol corresponding to the first number of times in the result display situation while preventing the first number of times information from being displayed on the switching number display unit in the number of times display situation. 4. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3, wherein display control is performed so that is displayed on the result display unit.

  According to the means 4, when the variable pitching means is opened / closed based on the establishment of the special condition, the information including the symbol corresponding to the first number is displayed not in the switching number display part but in the result display part. Thus, when the opening and closing of the variable pitching means is performed for the first number of times, it is predicted to the player whether it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or because the special condition is satisfied. On the other hand, it is possible for the manager of the game hall to confirm which state the opening and closing of the variable pitching means relates to by checking the switching number display section.

Means 5. The result display status is a result display period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, and the number display status is a number display period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing,
The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein at least a part of the result display period and the number display period overlap.

  According to the means 5, when the result display period and the number display period at least partially overlap, the lottery result of the lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition of the first special gaming state. The player has an opportunity to confirm that the display of the first special correspondence information in the result display unit and the display of the information for the first number of times in the switching number display unit are performed at the same time. Then, it is difficult for the player who has confirmed the state of the display to determine which of the result display part and the switching number display part indicates the number of times of switching of the variable pitching means. Then, when the player opens / closes the variable pitching means based on the establishment of the special condition, the information including the symbol corresponding to the first number displayed on the result display unit is changed to the first special gaming state. It is considered that it is easy to determine that the transition is similar to the case where the transition occurs. As a result, even if the player sees the result display section and the switching count display section, the opening and closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition of the first special gaming state, or corresponds to the establishment of a special condition. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether it is a thing.

  Note that the game turning operation is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed by the lottery means and the game turning operation device (symbol display device 41) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine, and the lottery means In the state where the game turn operation is ended in a state corresponding to the lottery result of the game, the game round is finished as one game round, and the game of each game round according to the lottery performed by the lottery means In a configuration including game rotation operation control means (audio lamp control device 82, display control device 212) for controlling the game rotation operation device so that the rotation operation is performed, the result display period is set to It is good also as a period from when a game round is complete | finished to when the next game round is started. The number display period may be a period from when the opening / closing control by the opening / closing control means is started to when the opening / closing control is ended.

  Further, in place of or in addition to the configuration, the information display control means starts the display of the variation of the pattern based on the fact that the lottery means has been performed, and the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means And the result display so that the variation display of the pattern of each game is performed in response to the fact that the lottery means that the lottery has been performed. In the configuration in which the display is controlled, the result display period may be a period from the end of the game time to the start of the next game time. The number display period may be a period from when the opening / closing control by the opening / closing control means is started to when the opening / closing control is ended.

  Moreover, you may apply the said structure with respect to the following means in each means for solving a subject.

  Means 6. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the result display period is set so as to include the entire number display period.

  According to the means 6, it is possible for the player to make the effect of making it difficult to determine which of the result display part and the switching number display part indicates the number of times of switching of the variable entry means. It becomes.

  Mean 7 The special display control means performs display control so that information including a number corresponding to the first number in the result display situation is displayed on the result display unit. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to 6.

  According to the means 7, when the special condition is satisfied, the result display unit displays information including a number corresponding to the first number in the result display situation, so that it is variable for the player in the result display unit. It is easy to determine that the number of times of switching of the ball entry means is displayed. As a result, even if the player sees the result display section and the switching number display section, the opening / closing of the variable entry means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the establishment of the special condition. It is possible to make it difficult to judge whether it is a thing.

  Means 8. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7, wherein the result display section and the switching frequency display section are arranged in parallel.

  According to the means 8, the result display part and the switching number display part are provided in parallel, so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the two.

  Means 9. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8, wherein the result display section and the switching frequency display section are display sections having a common configuration.

  According to the means 9, since the result display unit and the switching number display unit are display units having a common configuration, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the two.

Means 10. A first start entrance part (upper operation port 33) and a second start entrance part (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
The lottery means performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the special game state based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the first start ball entering part or the second start ball entering part,
When a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the first start ball entering part, the transition to the first special game state may occur, and the special condition Is a configuration that can occur,
When a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the second start ball entering part, at least one of transition to the first special game state or establishment of the special condition Is a configuration that does not occur,
As the result display section,
A first result display unit (first result display unit AS) for displaying information on a lottery result of the lottery means based on a game ball entering the first start ball entering unit;
A second result display unit (second result display unit BS) for displaying information on a lottery result of the lottery means based on the game ball entering the second start ball entering unit;
With
The switching number display unit, the first result display unit, and the second result display unit are arranged such that the position of the switching result display unit is closer to the first result display unit than the second result display unit. 10. The gaming machine according to any one of means 4 to 9, wherein the gaming machine is arranged.

  According to the means 10, the lottery result information based on the lottery based on the game ball entering the first start ball entering portion is displayed on the first result display portion, and the game ball to the second start ball entering portion. Since the lottery result information based on the lottery is displayed on the second result display section, the game hall manager can distinguish and grasp each lottery result.

  In this case, both the transition to the first special gaming state and the establishment of the special condition can occur because of the first starting ball entering unit and the second starting ball entering unit to the first starting ball entering unit. This is a case where a game ball has entered, and accordingly, whether the opening and closing of the variable ball entry means corresponds to the transition to the first special game state or the special condition is met. In the prediction, the first result display unit of the first result display unit and the second result display unit and the switching number display unit are considered, and the second result display unit is considered not to be focused. Under such circumstances, the switching number display unit, the first result display unit, and the second result are arranged so that the position of the switching result display unit is closer to the first result display unit than the second result display unit. By arranging the display unit and the configuration limited by the means 4 etc., even if the player sees the first result display unit and the switching number display unit, the opening and closing of the variable entry means is the first special opening / closing unit. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the state corresponds to the transition to the gaming state or whether the special condition is satisfied.

Means 11. A first start entrance part (upper operation port 33) and a second start entrance part (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
The lottery means performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the special game state based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the first start ball entering part or the second start ball entering part,
Further, the second starting entrance part is an acceptance control means (main control) capable of switching between a non-acceptance state in which game balls are difficult to enter or cannot enter and an accept state in which game balls are easy to enter. A function for executing the electric power support process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
The acceptance control means is a switching mode for switching the second starting ball-injection portion between the non-acceptance state and the acceptance state, and there is a relative chance that the acceptance state does not become the acceptance state or per unit time. Having a low low frequency switching mode and a high frequency switching mode with a relatively high opportunity to become the acceptance state per unit time,
As the result display section,
A first result display unit (first result display unit AS) for displaying information on a lottery result of the lottery means based on a game ball entering the first start ball entering unit;
A second result display unit (second result display unit BS) for displaying information on a lottery result of the lottery means based on the game ball entering the second start ball entering unit;
With
The switching number display unit, the first result display unit, and the second result display unit are arranged such that the position of the switching result display unit is closer to the first result display unit than the second result display unit. 10. The gaming machine according to any one of means 4 to 9, wherein the gaming machine is arranged.

  According to the means 11, the lottery result information based on the lottery based on the game ball entering the first start ball entering part is displayed on the first result display part and the game ball to the second start ball entering part. Since the lottery result information based on the lottery is displayed on the second result display section, the game hall manager can distinguish and grasp each lottery result.

  In addition, the game ball entering the second start entrance part is likely to occur in the high frequency switching mode and difficult to occur in the low frequency change mode. There is no change in the ease of entering the game ball with respect to the game part. In this case, in the configuration in which the low-frequency switching mode and the high-frequency switching mode are likely to stay in the low-frequency switching mode, the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state, or The frequency of occurrence of a situation in which the player predicts whether the special condition is met is determined by the game ball entering the first starting entrance part of the first starting entrance part and the second starting entrance part. The case where a sphere is generated becomes high. Then, when the player predicts whether the opening and closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the special condition, the first result display unit and the second Of the two result display parts, the first result display part and the switching frequency display part are considered to be noticed, and the second result display part is considered to be hardly noticed. Under such circumstances, the switching number display unit, the first result display unit, and the second result are arranged so that the position of the switching result display unit is closer to the first result display unit than the second result display unit. By arranging the display unit and the configuration limited by the means 4 etc., even if the player sees the first result display unit and the switching number display unit, the opening and closing of the variable entry means is the first special opening / closing unit. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the state corresponds to the transition to the gaming state or whether the special condition is satisfied.

Means 12. A first start entrance part (upper operation port 33) and a second start entrance part (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
The lottery means performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the special game state based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the first start ball entering part or the second start ball entering part,
When a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the first start ball entering part, the transition to the first special game state may occur, and the special condition Is a configuration that can occur,
When a lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the second starting ball entering part, the transition to the first special game state may occur, and the special condition Is a configuration that can occur,
An accepting control means (main control device 81) capable of switching the second starting entrance part between a non-accepting state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and an accepting state in which a game ball is easy to enter. A function for executing a power support process in the MPU 202 of
The acceptance control means is
As a switching mode for switching the second starting entrance ball portion between the non-accepting state and the accepting state, a low-frequency switching mode in which the accepting state is not entered or the accepting state per unit time is relatively low. And a high-frequency switching mode with a relatively high opportunity to become the acceptance state per unit time,
Further, even if the lottery result by the lottery means in the low frequency switching mode is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state, the switching mode up to that time is maintained, and in the high frequency switching mode the When the lottery result by the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state, the high-frequency switching mode is maintained until at least the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special gaming state winning. 1 maintaining means (function for executing the processing of steps S2406 to S2408 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
When the special condition is satisfied, the second maintaining means (MPU 202 of the main control device 81) maintains the previous switching mode regardless of whether the switching mode is the high frequency switching mode or the low frequency switching mode. The function of executing the process of step S2409 in FIG.
With
As the result display section,
A first result display unit (first result display unit AS) for displaying information on a lottery result of the lottery means based on a game ball entering the first start ball entering unit;
A second result display unit (second result display unit BS) for displaying information on a lottery result of the lottery means based on the game ball entering the second start ball entering unit;
With
The switching number display unit, the first result display unit, and the second result display unit are arranged such that the position of the switching result display unit is closer to the first result display unit than the second result display unit. 10. The gaming machine according to any one of means 4 to 9, wherein the gaming machine is arranged.

  According to the means 12, the lottery result information based on the lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entering part is displayed on the first result display part and the game ball to the second starting ball entering part. Since the lottery result information based on the lottery is displayed on the second result display section, the game hall manager can distinguish and grasp each lottery result.

  In the situation where the switching mode is the low-frequency switching mode, the low-frequency switching mode is maintained regardless of whether the special condition is satisfied or the transition to the first special gaming state. Therefore, in the situation where the switching mode is at least the low-frequency switching mode, even if the player confirms the state of the second starting pitching portion when the variable pitching means is opened and closed for the first time, It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the state corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or whether the special condition is satisfied.

  In addition, in a situation where the switching mode is the high frequency switching mode, even if the special condition is satisfied, the high frequency switching mode is maintained, so that the player is not disadvantaged by the special condition being satisfied. In the case of further transition to the first special gaming state, the high-frequency switching mode is maintained until at least the next special gaming state winning occurs, so that it is advantageous that the transition to the first special gaming state occurs. Sexuality is enhanced.

  In the above configuration, in the situation where the switching mode is the high-frequency switching mode, the high-frequency switching mode is maintained regardless of whether the special condition is satisfied or the first special gaming state is entered. However, in the former, the switching mode until then is simply maintained, whereas in the latter, it is maintained at least until the next special gaming state winning occurs. Then, there is a difference in how the switching mode is maintained between the case where the special condition is satisfied and the case where the transition to the first special gaming state is made, and when the player recognizes the difference, the opening and closing of the variable pitching means is It will be possible to clearly determine whether the state corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or corresponds to the establishment of the special condition. Therefore, in the situation of the high-frequency switching mode, the player predicts whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or to the establishment of the special condition. The situation is difficult to occur.

  On the other hand, in the situation where the switching mode is the low-frequency switching mode, the low-frequency switching mode is maintained regardless of whether the special condition is satisfied or the transition to the first special gaming state. In the situation of the low-frequency switching mode, the game ball enters the first start ball entering part, but the game ball does not enter or enters the second start ball entering part. Therefore, in the situation of the low-frequency switching mode, the player predicts whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special game state or the special condition. Then, it is thought that the 1st result display part of the 1st result display part and the 2nd result display part, and the switching frequency display part pay attention, and the 2nd result display part is hard to pay attention.

  Under the circumstances as described above, the switching number display unit, the first result display unit, and the second result are set so that the position of the switching result display unit is closer to the first result display unit than the second result display unit. By arranging the result display section and providing the configuration limited by the means 4 etc., even if the player sees the first result display section and the switching number display section, the opening and closing of the variable entry means is the first. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the state corresponds to the transition to the special gaming state or the special condition is satisfied.

  In the configuration of any one of the means 10 to 12, the information display control means is based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state. It is good also as a structure which carries out display control of the result display part corresponding to the start pitching part used as the lottery opportunity of the said lottery so that said 1st special correspondence information may be displayed in the said situation for result display. Further, the special condition is that the lottery means performs lottery based on occurrence of a game ball entering the first start ball entering part or the second start ball entering part, and the lottery means If the lottery result by is not the special gaming state winning, the special display control means, if the special condition is met, the lottery by the lottery means when the special condition is met It is good also as a structure which carries out display control of the result display part corresponding to the starting pitching part used as the opportunity.

Means 13. The information display control means starts displaying the variation of the picture based on the fact that the lottery means has been performed, displays the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means, and ends the variation display of the pattern. The first result display unit and the second result display unit so that the variation display of the pattern of each game time is performed in response to the fact that the lottery means has been performed. Display control of the result display unit corresponding to the starting pitching unit that became the lottery trigger by the lottery means,
Furthermore, as the special gaming state winning, at least a first winning and a second winning are set,
The first transition means shifts the gaming state to the first special gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first winning,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means the second winning, the switching mode becomes the high-frequency switching mode, and the number of game times in the high-frequency switching mode is the limited number of games. The second transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the second special gaming state in which the switching mode becomes the low-frequency switching mode at least occurs in the high-frequency switching corresponding state (the normal big hit flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81). The gaming machine according to claim 12, further comprising a function of executing a gaming state transition process in a stored situation.

  According to the means 13, diversification of the special game state is achieved. In this case, in the high-frequency switching mode generated by the transition to the second special gaming state, if the special condition is satisfied, the low-frequency switching mode even if the lottery result by the lottery means does not become the special gaming state winning. However, when the transition to the first special gaming state occurs, the low-frequency switching mode is not established unless the lottery result by the lottery means is the special gaming state winning. Then, in the high-frequency switching mode, there is a difference in how the switching mode is maintained between when the special condition is satisfied and when shifting to the first special gaming state. It will be possible to clearly determine whether the opening / closing of the ball means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the establishment of the special condition. Therefore, in the situation of the high-frequency switching mode, the player predicts whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or to the establishment of the special condition. The situation is difficult to occur. Therefore, the configuration of the means 12 is preferable.

Means 14. The first result display unit is arranged at a position aligned in a predetermined direction with respect to the switching number display unit,
The gaming machine according to any one of means 10 to 13, wherein the second result display unit is arranged on the opposite side of the switching number display unit across the first result display unit.

  According to the means 14, since the second result display unit is installed on the opposite side of the switching number display unit across the first result display unit, the area where each result display unit is arranged is aggregated, and the game hall This makes it easier for the administrator to grasp the position of the result display section. Further, even in this configuration, since the position where the first result display unit is closer to the second result display unit with respect to the switching number display unit is maintained, any one of the above means 10 to 13 can be maintained. The effect in 1 can be produced.

  Note that any one of the above-described means 10 to 14 may be applied to any one of the means 18 to means 27, the means 33, and the means 41 described later.

Means 15. A lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and a lottery mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high or low Lottery means (function to execute information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, function to execute variation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
A variable pitching means (variable winning device 32) provided in a game area where the game ball flows down and capable of switching between an open state in which the game ball flowing down is easy to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter;
An opening / closing control means (a function for executing a big prize opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for performing an opening / closing control for switching to the closed state after the variable pitching means is opened;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special game state winning, the number of times the variable pitching means is switched to the closed state after becoming the open state is a first predetermined number of times. A first transition means for shifting the gaming state to a first special gaming state in which the lottery mode in the lottery means becomes the high probability mode. A function of executing a gaming state transition process in a situation where the implicit 2R probability change flag in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 is stored in the RAM 204),
A switching number display part (round display part RS) for displaying information on the number of times of switching at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state, information for the first number corresponding to the first number is displayed in a predetermined number of times display situation. Information display control means (a function for executing a round display start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display of the number of times of switching as described above,
With
The opening / closing control means sets the number of times of switching to the first number of times based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning and a predetermined special condition is satisfied. Special opening / closing control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable pitching means (a function for executing a special winning opening opening / closing process in a situation where a special out flag in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 is stored in the RAM 204),
When the variable pitching means is controlled to be opened and closed by the special opening and closing control means, the lottery mode by the lottery means is configured to maintain the lottery mode until then,
The information display control means is configured so that information including the same symbol as the first number of times information is displayed in a display color different from the first number of times information in the number of times display situation based on the establishment of the special condition. Special display control means for controlling the display of the switching number display section so that it is displayed (specifically referring to the stop result table shown in FIG. 34 in the situation where the special out flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) A game machine having a function of executing round display start processing based on the information obtained.

  In the gaming machine of the means 15, when the gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state, the information for the first number is displayed on the switching number display portion in the number of times display situation, and the gaming hall that has seen it is displayed. Can grasp the number of times of opening and closing the variable pitching means.

  In this case, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special game state winning, if the predetermined special condition is satisfied, the variable pitching means is the same as in the first special game state. The opening / closing control is performed until the number of times of switching reaches the first number. Thereby, when opening and closing in the variable pitching means is performed for the first number of times, it is determined to the player whether it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or because the special condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to make predictions, and monotonization of the game is suppressed.

  Further, when the special condition is satisfied as described above, the lottery mode by the lottery means maintains the previous lottery mode, so that the advantage of the first special gaming state is ensured and the special condition is satisfied. As a result, the lottery mode will not shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, so the player may be disadvantaged by the establishment of special conditions in the configuration where the monotonization of the game is suppressed as described above. Absent.

  However, when the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the special condition, if the display is clearly different from the transition to the first special gaming state on the switching number display unit, By looking at the switching number display section, it can be easily determined that the opening / closing of the variable pitching means does not correspond to the transition to the first special gaming state but corresponds to the establishment of the special condition. If it does so, the effect which suppresses the monotonization of the said game will lose | disappear or will be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the special condition, information including the same symbol as the first count information is displayed on the switching count display section in the count display situation. May be. Thereby, even if the player looks at the switching number display section, it is determined whether the opening and closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It becomes possible to make it difficult.

  On the other hand, information including the same symbol as the first number information displayed on the switching number display unit when the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the special condition is the first number information. A different display color is set. Therefore, as described above, the game hall makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It becomes possible for the administrator of the system to be able to judge.

  Note that “a predetermined special condition is satisfied” includes a special lottery result in the lottery means or in a different lottery means.

  In the means 15, the first number information may be information including a number corresponding to the first number.

  Means 16. The special opening / closing control means controls opening / closing of the variable pitching means until the number of times of switching becomes the first number of times based on the establishment of the special condition, and the mode of the opening / closing control is changed to the first opening / closing control mode. The gaming machine according to means 15, characterized in that it is recognized as being in the same execution state.

  According to the means 16, even when the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special game state winning, if the predetermined special condition is satisfied, the variable entry means is in the first special game state. In the same manner as described above, the opening / closing control is performed until the number of switching times reaches the first number. Furthermore, the aspect of the opening / closing control at that time is such an aspect that it is recognized that it is the same as the first opening / closing execution state that occurs when shifting to the first special gaming state. Thereby, when opening and closing in the variable pitching means is performed for the first number of times, it is determined to the player whether it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or because the special condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to make predictions, and monotonization of the game is suppressed.

Means 17. As the special gaming state winning, at least a first winning and a second winning are set,
The first transition means shifts the gaming state to the first special gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first winning,
Further, based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the second winning, until the variable pitching means or the variable pitching means different from the above is the second predetermined number of times of switching. Second transition means (a 15R probability change flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that shifts the gaming state to the second special gaming state where the second opening / closing execution state that is controlled to open / close by the opening / closing control means occurs at least. A function to execute the game state transition process in a situation where
The game according to means 16, wherein the first opening / closing execution state is set as a state in which entering of the game ball into the variable entry means is less likely to occur than in the second opening / closing execution state. Machine.

  According to the means 17, in the first opening / closing execution state and the second opening / closing execution state, the first opening / closing execution state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable entry means is the same as the opening / closing control mode. As can be appreciated, the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of special conditions. This makes it possible to relatively reduce the benefits that the player can obtain when opening and closing the variable pitching means based on the establishment of special conditions. Therefore, it is possible to open and close the variable pitching means based on the establishment of the special condition while suppressing the influence on the game ball exit rate.

  It should be noted that “the state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means” includes, for example, a configuration in which a single opening time is set short, and when the opening state is reached. The configuration that switches to the closed state based on the occurrence of the entrance of the open limit number of game balls includes a configuration in which the open limit number is set to be small.

  Further, instead of the configuration of the means 17, the following configuration may be applied. That is, it includes a launching unit (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area at a predetermined launch period in accordance with a launch operation by the player, and the opening / closing control unit further includes the variable entrance ball In the configuration in which the variable entry means is closed when the opening restriction period has elapsed when the means is in the open state, the opening restriction period in the first opening / closing execution state is shorter than the firing cycle. Thus, a configuration may be adopted in which the entry of the game ball does not substantially occur when the variable entry means is opened and closed based on the first opening / closing execution state and the establishment of the special condition.

  In addition, it includes a launching unit (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area at a predetermined launch period in accordance with a launch operation by the player, and the opening / closing control unit includes the variable entrance ball In the configuration in which the variable entry means is in the closed state when the closing condition of either the elapse of the opening restriction period or the entry of the opening restriction number of game balls is satisfied when the means is in the open state, The opening restriction period in the first opening / closing execution state is made shorter than the product of the firing period and the opening restriction number, so that the variable pitching means can be opened and closed based on the first opening / closing execution state and the special condition. It may be configured to make it difficult for game balls to enter.

Means 18. A result display unit (first result display unit AS) for displaying information on the lottery result of the lottery means at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
The information display control means displays the first special correspondence information in a predetermined result display situation based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state. The game machine according to any one of means 15 to 17, wherein the result display section is controlled to be displayed.

  According to the means 18, when the gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state, the first special correspondence information is displayed on the result display unit in the result display situation, so that the number of switching times is displayed in the number display situation. Compared to a configuration in which the first number-of-times information is simply displayed on the section, it becomes easier for the game hall manager to grasp that the state shifts to the first special game state.

  Means 19. The special display control means controls the display of the result display unit so that information including the same symbol as the information for the first number of times is displayed in the result display situation based on the establishment of the special condition. The gaming machine according to claim 18, characterized in that:

  According to the means 19, when the variable pitching means is opened / closed based on the establishment of the special condition, the information including the same symbol as the first number information is displayed in the switching number display section in the number display situation. In addition to being displayed in a display color different from the one-time information, information including the same symbol as the first-number information is displayed in the result display section in the result display situation. That is, when the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the special condition, the same information as the first number of times is displayed in both the switching number display part in the number display situation and the result display part in the result display situation. The information including the symbol is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special game state or the special condition.

  Means 20. The special display control means displays information including the same symbol as the first number in the same display color as the first number of times in the result display situation based on the establishment of the special condition. The gaming machine according to claim 18, wherein the display of the result display unit is controlled as described above.

  According to the means 20, when the variable pitching means is opened / closed based on the establishment of the special condition, the information including the same symbol as the first number information is displayed in the switching number display section in the number display situation. In addition to being displayed in a display color different from the one-time information, information including the same symbol as the first-number information in the result display section in the result display situation is the same display color as the first-number information. Is displayed. That is, when the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the special condition, the same information as the first number of times is displayed in both the switching number display part in the number display situation and the result display part in the result display situation. The information including the symbol is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the opening and closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the special condition. .

  Furthermore, according to this configuration, it is difficult for the player to determine which of the switching number display part and the result display part indicates the number of times of switching of the variable pitching means. Then, for a player who has determined that the number of times of switching of the variable pitching means is indicated in the result display section, the information indicating the same symbol as the first count information is displayed in the result display section. Because it is displayed in the same display color as the information for use, it is difficult to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It becomes possible.

Means 21. The information display control means, when the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state, the information for the first number of times as the first special correspondence information in the result display situation The result display unit can be displayed and controlled so that information including the same symbol is displayed in a display color different from the information for the first number of times,
In the special display control means, when the variable pitching means is controlled to be opened and closed by the special opening / closing control means, information including the same symbol as the information for the first number in the number display situation is the first special correspondence. The gaming machine according to any one of means 18 to 20, wherein the switching number display section can be controlled to be displayed in the same display color as the information.

  According to the means 21, when the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition of the first special gaming state, the first number information is displayed on the switching number display section in the number display situation. At the same time, information including the same symbol as the first count information may be displayed in a display color different from the first count information in the result display section in the result display situation. A player who visually recognizes such a display is difficult to determine which of the result display part and the switching number display part indicates the number of times of switching of the variable pitching means.

  In this case, when the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the special condition, information including the same symbol as the first number information is displayed on the switching number display unit in the number display state. It may be displayed in the same display color as 1 special correspondence information. As a result, even if the player sees the result display section and the switching count display section, the opening and closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition of the first special gaming state, or corresponds to the establishment of a special condition. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether it is a thing.

Means 22. The result display status is a result display period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, and the number display status is a number display period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing,
The gaming machine according to any one of means 19 to 21, wherein at least a part of the result display period and the number display period overlap.

  According to the means 22, when the result display period and the number display period at least partially overlap, the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition of the first special gaming state. The player has an opportunity to confirm that the display of the first special correspondence information in the result display unit and the display of the information for the first number of times in the switching number display unit are performed at the same time. In the configuration provided with any one of the above means 19 to 21, the player who has confirmed the state of the display indicates which of the result display part and the switching number display part indicates the number of times of switching of the variable pitching means. It is difficult to judge whether it is showing. As a result, even if the player sees the result display section and the switching count display section, the opening and closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition of the first special gaming state, or corresponds to the establishment of a special condition. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether it is a thing.

  Note that the game turning operation is started on the basis of the fact that the lottery is performed by the lottery operation device (symbol display device 41) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine, and the lottery The game turn operation is terminated in a state where the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the means is completed, and the game times of the respective game times are determined according to the fact that the lottery means has been performed. In a configuration including game turn operation control means (sound lamp control device 82, display control device 212) for controlling the game turn operation device so that a game turn operation is performed, the result display period is set as follows: It is good also as a period from the case where the said game times are complete | finished to the case where the next game time is started. The number display period may be a period from when the opening / closing control by the opening / closing control means is started to when the opening / closing control is ended.

  Further, in place of or in addition to the configuration, the information display control means starts the display of the variation of the pattern based on the fact that the lottery means has been performed, and the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means When the display of the variation of the pattern is ended in the state where the symbol is displayed, the variation display of the pattern of each gaming time is performed in response to the fact that the lottery means the lottery is performed. In the configuration in which display control of the result display unit is performed, the result display period may be a period from the end of the game time to the start of the next game time. The number display period may be a period from when the opening / closing control by the opening / closing control means is started to when the opening / closing control is ended.

  Means 23. The gaming machine according to claim 22, wherein the result display period is set to include the entire number display period.

  According to the means 23, it is possible for the player to make the effect that it is difficult for the player to determine which of the result display part and the switching number display part indicates the number of times of switching of the variable pitching means. It becomes.

  Means 24. The gaming machine according to any one of means 19 to 23, wherein the result display section and the switching number display section are arranged in parallel.

  According to the means 24, since the result display section and the switching number display section are arranged in parallel, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the two.

  Means 25. The gaming machine according to any one of means 19 to 24, wherein the result display section and the switching number display section comprise display sections having a common configuration.

  According to the means 25, since the result display unit and the switching number display unit are display units having a common configuration, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the two.

Means 26. A lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and a lottery mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high or low Lottery means (function to execute information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, function to execute variation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
A variable pitching means (variable winning device 32) provided in a game area where the game ball flows down and capable of switching between an open state in which the game ball flowing down is easy to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter;
An opening / closing control means (a function for executing a big prize opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for performing an opening / closing control for switching to the closed state after the variable pitching means is opened;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special game state winning, the number of times the variable pitching means is switched to the closed state after becoming the open state is a first predetermined number of times. A first transition means for shifting the gaming state to a first special gaming state in which the lottery mode in the lottery means becomes the high probability mode. A function of executing a gaming state transition process in a situation where the implicit 2R probability change flag in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 is stored in the RAM 204),
A result display unit (first result display unit AS) for displaying information on the lottery result of the lottery means at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
A switching number display part (round display part RS) for displaying information on the number of times of switching at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state, the first special correspondence information is displayed on the result display unit in a predetermined result display situation. Display control means for controlling the display of the number of times of switching so that the first number of times information is displayed in a predetermined number of times display situation (main control device 81) The function of executing round display start processing in the MPU 202 of
With
The opening / closing control means sets the number of times of switching to the first number of times based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning and a predetermined special condition is satisfied. Special opening / closing control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable pitching means (a function for executing a special winning opening opening / closing process in a situation where a special out flag in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 is stored in the RAM 204),
When the variable pitching means is controlled to be opened and closed by the special opening and closing control means, the lottery mode by the lottery means is configured to maintain the lottery mode until then,
The information display control means displays the result so that information that is recognized as the same as the information for the first number of times in the result display situation is displayed based on the establishment of the special condition. Special display control means for controlling the display of the unit (start of round display based on information specified with reference to the stop result table shown in FIG. 34 in the situation where the special out flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) A gaming machine having a function of executing processing).

  In the gaming machine of the means 26, when the gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state, the first special correspondence information is displayed on the result display section in the result display situation, so that the game hall of the gaming hall that has seen it is displayed. The manager can grasp the transition to the first special gaming state, and further, the information for the first number of times is displayed on the switching number display part in the number of times display situation, so that the management of the game hall that has seen it The person can grasp the number of times of opening and closing the variable pitching means.

  In this case, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special game state winning, if the predetermined special condition is satisfied, the variable pitching means is the same as in the first special game state. The opening / closing control is performed until the number of times of switching reaches the first number. Thereby, when opening and closing in the variable pitching means is performed for the first number of times, it is determined to the player whether it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or because the special condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to make predictions, and monotonization of the game is suppressed.

  Further, when the special condition is satisfied as described above, the lottery mode by the lottery means maintains the previous lottery mode, so that the advantage of the first special gaming state is ensured and the special condition is satisfied. As a result, the lottery mode will not shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, so the player may be disadvantaged by the establishment of special conditions in the configuration where the monotonization of the game is suppressed as described above. Absent.

  However, when the variable pitching means is opened / closed based on the establishment of the special condition, if the result display section and the switching number display section display a distinctly different display from the transition to the first special gaming state. The player can easily see that the opening and closing of the variable pitching means does not correspond to the transition to the first special game state but corresponds to the establishment of the special condition by looking at the result display section and the switching number display section. Can be judged. If it does so, the effect which suppresses the monotonization of the said game will lose | disappear or will be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the variable pitching means is opened / closed based on the establishment of the special condition, information that is recognized to be the same as the information for the first number of times is displayed in the result display situation. May be displayed in the section. Then, even if the player who recognizes that the information for the first number of times is displayed when the gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state, even if the result display unit and the switching number display unit are viewed, It can be difficult to determine whether the opening / closing of the ball means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the establishment of the special condition.

  On the other hand, when the variable pitching means is opened / closed in response to the transition to the first special gaming state, the first special correspondence information is displayed in the result display section in the result display situation. As described above, it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to open and close the variable entry means so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the opening or closing of the variable entry means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the special condition. Can be determined.

  Note that “a predetermined special condition is satisfied” includes a special lottery result in the lottery means or in a different lottery means.

  Means 27. The special display control means displays the result so that information that is recognized to be the same as the information for the first number of times in the result display situation is displayed based on the establishment of the special condition. Display control of the switching number display unit so that information that is recognized to be the same as the first special correspondence information in the number display situation is displayed. 27. A gaming machine according to the feature 26.

  According to the means 27, when the variable pitching means is opened / closed based on the establishment of the special condition, the information that is recognized to be the same as the information for the first number of times is the result in the result display situation. Information displayed on the display unit and recognized as being the same as the first special correspondence information may be displayed on the switching number display unit in the number display situation. Then, when the gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state, the player who recognizes that the first special correspondence information and the first number of times information are displayed will see the result display unit and the switching number display unit. Even so, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition.

  On the other hand, when the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the special condition, the display state in which the first special correspondence information is displayed on the result display unit in the result display situation does not occur, and the number of times is displayed. In the usage situation, a display state in which the first number of times information is displayed on the switching number display unit does not occur. Therefore, as described above, the game hall makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It becomes possible for the administrator of the system to be able to judge.

Means 28. A lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and a lottery mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high or low Lottery means (function to execute information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, function to execute variation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
A variable pitching means (variable winning device 32) provided in a game area where the game ball flows down and capable of switching between an open state in which the game ball flowing down is easy to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter;
An opening / closing control means (a function for executing a big prize opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for performing an opening / closing control for switching to the closed state after the variable pitching means is opened;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special game state winning, the number of times the variable pitching means is switched to the closed state after becoming the open state is a first predetermined number of times. A first transition means for shifting the gaming state to a first special gaming state in which the lottery mode in the lottery means becomes the high probability mode. A function of executing a gaming state transition process in a situation where the implicit 2R probability change flag in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 is stored in the RAM 204),
A result display unit (first result display unit AS) for displaying information on the lottery result of the lottery means at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
A switching number display part (round display part RS) for displaying information on the number of times of switching at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special game state, the first display color is displayed on the result display unit in a predetermined result display situation. Information display control means (MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display of the switching number display unit so that the second display color is displayed in a predetermined number of times display situation. Function for executing round display start processing in
With
The opening / closing control means sets the number of times of switching to the first number of times based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning and a predetermined special condition is satisfied. Special opening / closing control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable pitching means (a function for executing a special winning opening opening / closing process in a situation where a special out flag in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 is stored in the RAM 204),
When the variable pitching means is controlled to be opened and closed by the special opening and closing control means, the lottery mode by the lottery means is configured to maintain the lottery mode until then,
The information display control means displays the result display so as to display a display color that is recognized as the same as the second display color in the result display situation based on the establishment of the special condition. Special display control means for controlling the display of the switching number display unit so that a display color that is recognized as being the same as the first display color is displayed in the number display situation. The MPU 202 of the main control device 81 has a function of executing round display start processing based on information specified with reference to the stop result table shown in FIG. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the gaming machine of the means 28, when the gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state, the first display color is displayed on the result display portion in the result display situation, so that the management of the gaming hall that has seen it is performed. The player can grasp the transition to the first special gaming state, and further, the second display color is displayed on the switching number display part in the state for displaying the number of times. It is possible to grasp the number of times of opening and closing the variable pitching means.

  In this case, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special game state winning, if the predetermined special condition is satisfied, the variable pitching means is the same as in the first special game state. The opening / closing control is performed until the number of times of switching reaches the first number. Thereby, when opening and closing in the variable pitching means is performed for the first number of times, it is determined to the player whether it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or because the special condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to make predictions, and monotonization of the game is suppressed.

  Further, when the special condition is satisfied as described above, the lottery mode by the lottery means maintains the previous lottery mode, so that the advantage of the first special gaming state is ensured and the special condition is satisfied. As a result, the lottery mode will not shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, so the player may be disadvantaged by the establishment of special conditions in the configuration where the monotonization of the game is suppressed as described above. Absent.

  However, when the variable pitching means is opened / closed based on the establishment of the special condition, if the result display section and the switching number display section display a distinctly different display from the transition to the first special gaming state. The player can easily see that the opening and closing of the variable pitching means does not correspond to the transition to the first special game state but corresponds to the establishment of the special condition by looking at the result display section and the switching number display section. Can be judged. If it does so, the effect which suppresses the monotonization of the said game will lose | disappear or will be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the special condition, the display color that is recognized as the same as the second display color is the result display in the result display situation. A display color that is displayed on the display unit and recognized as the same as the first display color may be displayed on the switching number display unit in the number display situation. Then, if the player recognizes that the first display color and the second display color are displayed when the game state shifts to the first special game state, the player sees the result display unit and the switching number display unit. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special game state or the satisfaction of the special condition.

  On the other hand, when the variable pitching means is opened / closed based on the establishment of the special condition, the display state in which the first display color is displayed on the result display unit in the result display situation does not occur, and In the situation, the display state in which the second display color is displayed on the switching number display section does not occur. Therefore, as described above, the game hall makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It becomes possible for the administrator of the system to be able to judge.

  Note that “a predetermined special condition is satisfied” includes a special lottery result in the lottery means or in a different lottery means.

Means 29. A lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and a lottery mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high or low Lottery means (function to execute information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, function to execute variation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
A gaming device (variable winning device 32) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Game device control means (a function of executing a big prize opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for causing the gaming device to execute a predetermined operation so that the predetermined operation mode can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special game state winning, the game device control means performs control so that the predetermined operation is executed in the gaming device, and the lottery mode in the lottery means The first transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the first special gaming state in which the high probability mode is set (execution of the gaming state transition processing is performed in the situation where the implicit 2R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) Function)
A special display unit (round display unit RS) for displaying information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Information display control means for controlling the display of the special display unit (function of executing round display start processing and round display end processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
With
The gaming device control means is the same as the predetermined operation in the gaming device based on the fact that a predetermined special condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning. Special gaming machine control means for controlling the gaming machine so as to execute an operation that is recognized as (a special winning opening / closing process is performed in a situation in which the special removal flag in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 is stored in the RAM 204) Function to be executed)
When the gaming device is controlled by the special gaming device control means, the lottery mode by the lottery means is configured to maintain the lottery mode so far,
The information display control means is configured such that the display state is a switching state in a predetermined special display situation based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state. Switching control means for controlling the display of the special display unit so that the special information is displayed (the round display extinguishing process and the round display setting process shown in FIG. 35 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 are executed) Function)
The switching time control means indicates the state in which the special information is displayed on the special display unit based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special game state. It is maintained even after the state in which the predetermined operation is performed by the device is ended, and is maintained even when the gaming device is controlled by the special gaming device control means thereafter. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the gaming machine of means 29, since information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means is displayed on the special display section, the manager of the gaming hall who sees the information understands that it will shift to the first special gaming state. Can do.

  In this case, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning, if the predetermined special condition is satisfied, the gaming device shifts to the first special gaming state. An operation that is recognized as being the same as the predetermined operation that is executed in the case is executed. As a result, when a predetermined action or an action recognized as being the same as that is executed in the gaming device, it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or a special condition is established. It is possible to cause the player to predict whether or not it is due to the fact that the game has been performed, and the monotonization of the game can be suppressed.

  Further, when the special condition is satisfied as described above, the lottery mode by the lottery means maintains the previous lottery mode, so that the advantage of the first special gaming state is ensured and the special condition is satisfied. As a result, the lottery mode will not shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, so the player may be disadvantaged by the establishment of special conditions in the configuration where the monotonization of the game is suppressed as described above. Absent.

  However, when an operation that is recognized to be the same as the predetermined operation is executed in the gaming device based on the establishment of the special condition, it is clear that the special display unit shifts to the first special gaming state. If a different display is made, the player sees the special display unit, so that the operation of the gaming device does not correspond to the transition to the first special gaming state, but corresponds to the establishment of the special condition. It can be easily determined. If it does so, the effect which suppresses the monotonization of the said game will lose | disappear or will be reduced.

  On the other hand, the state in which the special information is displayed on the special display unit based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state causes the gaming device to perform a predetermined operation. Even if the state is maintained even after the state is ended, and an operation that is recognized as the same as the predetermined operation by the gaming device is executed based on the establishment of the special condition Maintained. Thereby, even if the player looks at the special display section, it is difficult to determine whether the operation in the gaming apparatus corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the establishment of the special condition. It becomes possible.

  On the other hand, when the special display unit is controlled based on the fact that the lottery result in the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special game state, the display on the special display unit is in the switching state. After that, the special information is displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the operation in the gaming device corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the establishment of the special condition as described above, and manages the gaming hall. It becomes possible for a person to be able to judge.

  Note that “a predetermined special condition is satisfied” includes a special lottery result in the lottery means or in a different lottery means.

Means 30. A lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and a lottery mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high or low Lottery means (function to execute information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, function to execute variation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
A variable pitching means (variable winning device 32) provided in a game area where the game ball flows down and capable of switching between an open state in which the game ball flowing down is easy to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter;
An opening / closing control means (a function for executing a big prize opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for performing an opening / closing control for switching to the closed state after the variable pitching means is opened;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special game state winning, the number of times the variable pitching means is switched to the closed state after becoming the open state is a first predetermined number of times. A first transition means for shifting the gaming state to a first special gaming state in which the lottery mode in the lottery means becomes the high probability mode. A function of executing a gaming state transition process in a situation where the implicit 2R probability change flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81;
A switching number display part (round display part RS) for displaying information on the number of times of switching at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Information display control means for controlling the display of the number of times of switching (function of executing round display start processing and round display end processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
With
The opening / closing control means sets the number of times of switching to the first number of times based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning and a predetermined special condition is satisfied. Special opening / closing control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable pitching means (a function for executing a special winning opening opening / closing process in a situation where a special out flag in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 is stored in the RAM 204),
When the variable pitching means is controlled to be opened and closed by the special opening and closing control means, the lottery mode by the lottery means is configured to maintain the lottery mode until then,
The information display control means is configured so that the display state is a switching time state in a predetermined number of times display situation based on the lottery result of the lottery means being a result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state. Switching means for controlling the display of the switching number display unit so that the first number information corresponding to the first number is displayed (the round display shown in FIG. 36 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81). The function to execute the process for turning off and the setting process of the round display)
The switching time control means is a state in which the first number of times information is displayed on the switching number display section based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state. Is maintained even after the variable pitching means is controlled to open and close until the number of times of switching becomes the first number of times, and thereafter the variable pitching means is controlled to open and close by the special opening / closing control means. A gaming machine that is maintained even in the case of a game.

  In the gaming machine of means 30, since information on the number of times of switching is displayed in the number of times of switching display section, the manager of the game hall who sees it displays the number of times of opening and closing the variable pitching means when shifting to the first special gaming state. Can be grasped.

  In this case, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special game state winning, if the predetermined special condition is satisfied, the variable pitching means is the same as in the first special game state. The opening / closing control is performed until the number of times of switching reaches the first number. Thereby, when opening and closing in the variable pitching means is performed for the first number of times, it is determined to the player whether it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or because the special condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to make predictions, and monotonization of the game is suppressed.

  Further, when the special condition is satisfied as described above, the lottery mode by the lottery means maintains the previous lottery mode, so that the advantage of the first special gaming state is ensured and the special condition is satisfied. As a result, the lottery mode will not shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, so the player may be disadvantaged by the establishment of special conditions in the configuration that suppresses monotonization of the game as described above. Absent.

  However, when the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the special condition, if the display is clearly different from the transition to the first special gaming state on the switching number display unit, By looking at the switching number display section, it can be easily determined that the opening / closing of the variable pitching means does not correspond to the transition to the first special gaming state but corresponds to the establishment of the special condition. If it does so, the effect which suppresses the monotonization of the said game will lose | disappear or will be reduced.

  On the other hand, the state in which the information for the first number is displayed on the switching number display section based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special game state is the variable entry means. Is maintained even after the opening / closing of the ball is finished, and is maintained even when the variable entry means is opened / closed based on the establishment of the special condition. Thereby, even if the player looks at the switching number display section, it is determined whether the opening and closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It becomes possible to make it difficult.

  On the other hand, when the switching number display unit is controlled based on the fact that the lottery result in the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state, the display on the switching number display unit is in the switching state. After that, the first number of times information is displayed. Therefore, as described above, the game hall makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It becomes possible for the administrator of the system to be able to judge.

  Note that “a predetermined special condition is satisfied” includes a special lottery result in the lottery means or in a different lottery means.

  In the means 30, the first number of times information may be information including a number corresponding to the first number of times.

  Means 31. The special opening / closing control means controls opening / closing of the variable pitching means until the number of switching times reaches the first number, and recognizes that the mode of the opening / closing control is the same as the first opening / closing execution state. A gaming machine according to claim 30, characterized by the following.

  According to the means 31, even when the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special game state winning, if the predetermined special condition is satisfied, the variable entry means is in the first special game state. In the same manner as described above, the opening / closing control is performed until the number of switching times reaches the first number. Furthermore, the aspect of the opening / closing control at that time is such an aspect that it is recognized that it is the same as the first opening / closing execution state that occurs when shifting to the first special gaming state. Thereby, when opening and closing in the variable pitching means is performed for the first number of times, it is determined to the player whether it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or because the special condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to make predictions, and monotonization of the game is suppressed.

Means 32. As the special gaming state winning, at least a first winning and a second winning are set,
The first transition means shifts the gaming state to the first special gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first winning,
Further, based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the second winning, until the variable pitching means or the variable pitching means different from the above is the second predetermined number of times of switching. Second transition means (a 15R probability change flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that shifts the gaming state to the second special gaming state where the second opening / closing execution state that is controlled to open / close by the opening / closing control means occurs at least. A function to execute the game state transition process in a situation where
The game according to means 31, wherein the first opening / closing execution state is set as a state in which it is harder for a game ball to enter the variable entry means than the second opening / closing execution state. Machine.

  According to the means 32, the first opening / closing execution state and the opening / closing control mode are the same in the first opening / closing execution state and the second opening / closing execution state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. As can be appreciated, the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of special conditions. This makes it possible to relatively reduce the benefits that the player can obtain when opening and closing the variable pitching means based on the establishment of special conditions. Therefore, it is possible to open and close the variable pitching means based on the establishment of the special condition while suppressing the influence on the game ball exit rate.

  It should be noted that “the state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means” includes, for example, a configuration in which a single opening time is set short, and when the opening state is reached. The configuration that switches to the closed state based on the occurrence of the entrance of the open limit number of game balls includes a configuration in which the open limit number is set to be small.

  Further, the following configuration may be applied instead of the configuration of the means 32. That is, it includes a launching unit (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area at a predetermined launch period in accordance with a launch operation by the player, and the opening / closing control unit further includes the variable entrance ball In the configuration in which the variable entry means is closed when the opening restriction period has elapsed when the means is in the open state, the opening restriction period in the first opening / closing execution state is shorter than the firing cycle. Thus, a configuration may be adopted in which the entry of the game ball does not substantially occur when the variable entry means is opened and closed based on the first opening / closing execution state and the establishment of the special condition.

  In addition, a launching unit (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area at a predetermined launch period in accordance with a launch operation by a player is provided, and the open / close control unit includes the variable entrance ball In the configuration in which the variable entry means is in the closed state when the closing condition of either the elapse of the opening restriction period or the entry of the opening restriction number of game balls is satisfied when the means is in the open state, The opening restriction period in the first opening / closing execution state is made shorter than the product of the firing period and the opening restriction number, so that the variable pitching means can be opened and closed based on the first opening / closing execution state and the special condition. It may be configured to make it difficult for game balls to enter.

  Means 33. When the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special game state, the switching time control means displays the switching state display section as non-display as the switching time state. The gaming machine according to any one of means 30 to 32, wherein display control is performed so that the information for the first number of times is displayed after the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period.

  According to the means 33, when the lottery result in the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special game state, the state where the switching number display portion is not displayed continues for a predetermined period. The count information is displayed. Therefore, as described above, the game hall makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It is possible to make it easy for a manager of the system to make a judgment.

Means 34. A result display unit (first result display unit AS) for displaying information on the lottery result of the lottery means at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
The information display control means displays the first special correspondence information in a predetermined result display situation based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state. When the result display unit is controlled to be displayed and the variable pitching means is controlled to be opened / closed by the special opening / closing control means, a display different from the first special correspondence information is made in the result display situation. The gaming machine according to any one of means 29 to 33, wherein the result display unit is controlled to be displayed as described above.

  According to the means 34, in the configuration in which the state where the first number of times information is displayed on the switching number display section is maintained even when the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the special condition, When the state shifts to the first special gaming state, the first special correspondence information is displayed on the result display section in the result display situation, so that the manager of the game hall who has seen it enters the first special gaming state. It is possible to grasp the transition.

Means 35. A lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and a lottery mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high or low Lottery means (function to execute information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, function to execute variation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
A gaming device (variable winning device 32) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Game device control means (a function of executing a big prize opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for causing the gaming device to execute a predetermined operation so that the predetermined operation mode can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special game state winning, the game device control means performs control so that the predetermined operation is executed in the gaming device, and the lottery mode in the lottery means The first transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the first special gaming state in which the high probability mode is set (execution of the gaming state transition processing is performed in the situation where the implicit 2R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) Function)
A special display unit (round display unit RS) for displaying information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Information display control means for controlling the display of the special display unit (function of executing round display start processing and round display end processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
With
The gaming device control means is the same as the predetermined operation in the gaming device based on the fact that a predetermined special condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning. Special gaming machine control means for controlling the gaming machine so as to execute an action that is recognized as (a special winning opening / closing process is performed in a situation where the special removal flag in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 is stored in the RAM 204) Function to be executed)
When the gaming device is controlled by the special gaming device control means, the lottery mode by the lottery means is configured to maintain the lottery mode so far,
The information display control means includes
On the basis of the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state, the special information is obtained after the display state is changed to the switching state in a predetermined special display situation. A switching time control means for controlling the display of the special display unit so as to be displayed (function of executing the process for changing the round display and the process for setting the round display shown in FIG. 38 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
The special information indicates the display state of the special display unit in a situation where the control of the gaming device by the gaming device control means based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is the special gaming state winning. Display state maintaining means (a function of executing the initial display switching process shown in FIG. 38 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for maintaining the state in the selected state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine of the means 35, since information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means is displayed on the special display section, the manager of the gaming hall who sees the information understands that it will shift to the first special gaming state. Can do.

  In this case, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning, if the predetermined special condition is satisfied, the gaming device shifts to the first special gaming state. An operation that is recognized as being the same as the predetermined operation that is executed in the case is executed. As a result, when a predetermined action or an action recognized as being the same as that is executed in the gaming device, it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or a special condition is established. It is possible to cause the player to predict whether or not it is due to the fact that the game has been performed, and the monotonization of the game can be suppressed.

  Further, when the special condition is satisfied as described above, the lottery mode by the lottery means maintains the previous lottery mode, so that the advantage of the first special gaming state is ensured and the special condition is satisfied. As a result, the lottery mode will not shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, so the player may be disadvantaged by the establishment of special conditions in the configuration where the monotonization of the game is suppressed as described above. Absent.

  However, when an operation that is recognized to be the same as the predetermined operation is executed in the gaming device based on the establishment of the special condition, it is clear that the special display unit shifts to the first special gaming state. If a different display is made, the player sees the special display unit, so that the operation of the gaming device does not correspond to the transition to the first special gaming state, but corresponds to the establishment of the special condition. It can be easily determined. If it does so, the effect which suppresses the monotonization of the said game will lose | disappear or will be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case where the display state of the special display unit in the situation where the operation in the gaming device based on the result of the lottery means that the lottery result is the special gaming state winning is shifted to the first special gaming state Since the special information that is displayed is also maintained in the displayed state, a special display is displayed when an action that is recognized as the same as the predetermined action is executed by the gaming device based on the establishment of the special condition. Special information will be displayed in the section. Thereby, even if the player looks at the special display unit, it is difficult to determine whether the operation in the gaming apparatus corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the establishment of the special condition. It becomes possible. In particular, when an operation that is recognized to be the same as the predetermined operation is executed in the gaming device based on the establishment of the special condition, the timing at which the operation is executed is any timing. Special information is displayed in the special display section.

  On the other hand, when the special display unit is controlled based on the fact that the lottery result in the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special game state, the display on the special display unit is in the switching state. After that, the special information is displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the operation in the gaming device corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the establishment of the special condition as described above, and manages the gaming hall. It becomes possible for a person to be able to judge.

  Note that “a predetermined special condition is satisfied” includes a special lottery result in the lottery means or in a different lottery means.

Means 36. A lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and a lottery mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high or low Lottery means (function to execute information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, function to execute variation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
A variable pitching means (variable winning device 32) provided in a game area where the game ball flows down and capable of switching between an open state in which the game ball flowing down is easy to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter;
An opening / closing control means (a function for executing a big prize opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for performing an opening / closing control for switching to the closed state after the variable pitching means is opened;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special game state winning, the number of times the variable pitching means is switched to the closed state after becoming the open state is a first predetermined number of times. A first transition means for shifting the gaming state to a first special gaming state in which the lottery mode in the lottery means becomes the high probability mode. A function of executing a gaming state transition process in a situation where the implicit 2R probability change flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81;
A switching number display part (round display part RS) for displaying information on the number of times of switching at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Information display control means for controlling the display of the number of times of switching (function of executing round display start processing and round display end processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
With
The opening / closing control means sets the number of times of switching to the first number of times based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning and a predetermined special condition is satisfied. Special opening / closing control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable pitching means (a function for executing a special winning opening opening / closing process in a situation where a special out flag in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 is stored in the RAM 204),
When the variable pitching means is controlled to be opened and closed by the special opening and closing control means, the lottery mode by the lottery means is configured to maintain the lottery mode until then,
The information display control means includes
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state, in the predetermined number of times display situation, the first state after the display state becomes the switching state. Switching time control means for controlling the display of the switching number display unit so that the first number of times information including a symbol corresponding to the number of times is displayed (round display changing process shown in FIG. 38 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) And a function for executing setting processing of round display),
The display state of the switching number display section in a situation where the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means by the opening / closing control means based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is the special gaming state winning is not performed. Display state maintaining means (a function for executing the initial display switching process shown in FIG. 38 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for maintaining the information including the symbol corresponding to the number of times to be displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine of the means 36, since information on the number of switching is displayed in the switching number display section, the manager of the game hall who sees it displays the number of times of opening and closing the variable pitching means when shifting to the first special gaming state. Can be grasped.

  In this case, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special game state winning, if the predetermined special condition is satisfied, the variable pitching means is the same as in the first special game state. The opening / closing control is performed until the number of times of switching reaches the first number. Thereby, when opening and closing in the variable pitching means is performed for the first number of times, it is determined to the player whether it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or because the special condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to make predictions, and monotonization of the game is suppressed.

  Further, when the special condition is satisfied as described above, the lottery mode by the lottery means maintains the previous lottery mode, so that the advantage of the first special gaming state is ensured and the special condition is satisfied. As a result, the lottery mode will not shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, so the player may be disadvantaged by the establishment of special conditions in the configuration where the monotonization of the game is suppressed as described above. Absent.

  However, when the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the special condition, if the display is clearly different from the transition to the first special gaming state on the switching number display unit, By looking at the switching number display section, it can be easily determined that the opening / closing of the variable pitching means does not correspond to the transition to the first special gaming state but corresponds to the establishment of the special condition. If it does so, the effect which suppresses the monotonization of the said game will lose | disappear or will be reduced.

  On the other hand, the display state of the switching number display unit in the situation where the variable pitching means is not opened / closed based on the result of the lottery means that the lottery result is the special game state winning is a symbol corresponding to the first number. The information including the symbol corresponding to the first number is displayed on the switching number display unit when the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the special condition. Become. Thereby, even if the player looks at the switching number display section, it is determined whether the opening and closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It becomes possible to make it difficult. In particular, when opening / closing of the variable pitching means is executed based on the establishment of a special condition, the switching number display unit corresponds to the first number regardless of the timing at which the opening / closing is executed. The information including the symbol is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the switching number display unit is controlled based on the fact that the lottery result in the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state, the display on the switching number display unit is in the switching state. After that, the first number of times information is displayed. Therefore, as described above, the game hall makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It becomes possible for the administrator of the system to be able to judge.

  Note that “a predetermined special condition is satisfied” includes a special lottery result in the lottery means or in a different lottery means.

  In the means 36, the first number information may be information including a number corresponding to the first number.

  Means 37. The special opening / closing control means controls opening / closing of the variable pitching means until the number of switching times reaches the first number, and recognizes that the mode of the opening / closing control is the same as the first opening / closing execution state. A gaming machine according to claim 36, characterized by the above.

  According to the means 37, even when the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special game state winning, if the predetermined special condition is satisfied, the variable entry means is in the first special game state. In the same manner as described above, the opening / closing control is performed until the number of switching times reaches the first number. Furthermore, the aspect of the opening / closing control at that time is such an aspect that it is recognized that it is the same as the first opening / closing execution state that occurs when shifting to the first special gaming state. Thereby, when opening and closing in the variable pitching means is performed for the first number of times, it is determined to the player whether it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or because the special condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to make predictions, and monotonization of the game is suppressed.

Means 38. As the special gaming state winning, at least a first winning and a second winning are set,
The first transition means shifts the gaming state to the first special gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first winning,
Further, based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the second winning, until the variable pitching means or the variable pitching means different from the above is the second predetermined number of times of switching. Second transition means (a 15R probability change flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that shifts the gaming state to the second special gaming state where the second opening / closing execution state that is controlled to open / close by the opening / closing control means occurs at least. A function to execute the game state transition process in a situation where
The means 36 or 37 is characterized in that the first opening / closing execution state is set as a state in which it is harder for a game ball to enter the variable entry means than the second opening / closing execution state. Game machines.

  According to the means 38, the first opening / closing execution state and the opening / closing control mode are the same in the first opening / closing execution state and the second opening / closing execution state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable entry means. As can be appreciated, the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of special conditions. This makes it possible to relatively reduce the benefits that the player can obtain when opening and closing the variable pitching means based on the establishment of special conditions. Therefore, it is possible to open and close the variable pitching means based on the establishment of the special condition while suppressing the influence on the game ball exit rate.

  It should be noted that “the state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means” includes, for example, a configuration in which a single opening time is set short, and when the opening state is reached. The configuration that switches to the closed state based on the occurrence of the entrance of the open limit number of game balls includes a configuration in which the open limit number is set to be small.

  Further, instead of the configuration of the means 38, the following configuration may be applied. That is, it includes a launching unit (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area at a predetermined launch period in accordance with a launch operation by the player, and the opening / closing control unit further includes the variable entrance ball In the configuration in which the variable entry means is closed when the opening restriction period has elapsed when the means is in the open state, the opening restriction period in the first opening / closing execution state is shorter than the firing cycle. Thus, a configuration may be adopted in which the entry of the game ball does not substantially occur when the variable entry means is opened and closed based on the first opening / closing execution state and the establishment of the special condition.

  In addition, it includes a launching unit (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball toward the game area at a predetermined launch period in accordance with a launch operation by the player, and the opening / closing control unit includes the variable entrance ball In the configuration in which the variable entry means is in the closed state when the closing condition of either the elapse of the opening restriction period or the entry of the opening restriction number of game balls is satisfied when the means is in the open state, The opening restriction period in the first opening / closing execution state is made shorter than the product of the firing period and the opening restriction number, so that the variable pitching means can be opened and closed based on the first opening / closing execution state and the special condition. It may be configured to make it difficult for game balls to enter.

Means 39. The information display control means displays the second number information corresponding to the second number in the number display situation based on the lottery result of the lotter means being the second winning. Display control of the switching number display unit,
The display state maintaining means, based on the fact that the second opening / closing execution state has ended in the situation where the second number of times information is displayed on the switching number display unit, the display state in the switching number display unit, The gaming machine according to claim 38, wherein the gaming machine is switched to a state in which information including a symbol corresponding to the first number of times is displayed.

  According to the means 39, when the gaming state shifts to the second special gaming state, the information for the second number of times is displayed on the switching number display portion in the number of times display situation, so that the game hall of the gaming hole that has seen it is displayed. The administrator can grasp the number of times of opening and closing the variable pitching means.

  In this case, the display state in the switching number display unit is a symbol corresponding to the first number based on the end of the second opening / closing execution state in the situation where the second number of times information is displayed on the switching number display unit. The information including is displayed. Thus, even if the opening / closing of the variable pitching means is executed based on the establishment of the special condition immediately after the second opening / closing execution state is finished, the symbol corresponding to the first number is displayed on the switching number display section. Will be displayed. Thereby, even if the player looks at the switching number display section, it is determined whether the opening and closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It becomes possible to make it difficult.

  Means 40. When the power supply to the gaming machine itself is started and the display control for the switching number display unit becomes possible, the display state maintaining unit corresponds the display state in the switching number display unit to the first number. 40. The gaming machine according to any one of means 36 to 39, wherein the gaming machine is set to information including a symbol.

  According to the means 40, when power supply to the gaming machine itself is started and display control for the switching number display unit is enabled, the switching number display unit displays information including a symbol corresponding to the first number. Will be started. Thereby, when opening / closing of the variable pitching means is executed based on the establishment of the special condition, the switching number display unit sets the first number of times regardless of the timing at which the opening / closing is executed. Information including the corresponding symbol will be displayed.

  Means 41. When the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special game state, the switching time control means displays the switching state display section as non-display as the switching time state. 41. The gaming machine according to any one of means 36 to 40, wherein display control is performed so that the information for the first number of times is displayed after the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period.

  According to the means 41, when the lottery result in the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special game state, the state where the switching number display portion is not displayed continues for a predetermined period. The count information is displayed. Therefore, as described above, the game hall makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It is possible to make it easy for a manager of the system to make a judgment.

Means 42. A result display unit (first result display unit AS) for displaying information on the lottery result of the lottery means at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
The information display control means displays the first special correspondence information in a predetermined result display situation based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state. When the result display unit is controlled to be displayed and the variable pitching means is controlled to be opened / closed by the special opening / closing control means, a display different from the first special correspondence information is made in the result display situation. The gaming machine according to any one of means 35 to 41, wherein the result display section is controlled to be displayed as described above.

  According to the means 42, in the configuration in which the state where the first number of times information is displayed on the switching number display section is maintained even when the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the special condition, When the state shifts to the first special gaming state, the first special correspondence information is displayed on the result display section in the result display situation, so that the manager of the game hall who has seen it enters the first special gaming state. It is possible to grasp the transition.

Means 43. A lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and a lottery mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high or low Lottery means (function to execute information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, function to execute variation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
A variable pitching means (variable winning device 32) provided in a game area where the game ball flows down and capable of switching between an open state in which the game ball flowing down is easy to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter;
An opening / closing control means (a function for executing a big prize opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for performing an opening / closing control for switching to the closed state after the variable pitching means is opened;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special game state winning, the number of times the variable pitching means is switched to the closed state after becoming the open state is a first predetermined number of times. A first transition means for shifting the gaming state to a first special gaming state in which the lottery mode in the lottery means becomes the high probability mode. A function of executing a gaming state transition process in a situation where the implicit 2R probability change flag in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 is stored in the RAM 204),
With
The opening / closing control means sets the number of times of switching to the first number of times based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning and a predetermined special condition is satisfied. Special opening / closing control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable pitching means (a function for executing a special winning opening opening / closing process in a situation where a special out flag in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 is stored in the RAM 204),
When the variable pitching means is controlled to be opened and closed by the special opening and closing control means, the lottery mode by the lottery means is configured to maintain the lottery mode until then,
Furthermore, a first display unit (small opening / closing light-emitting unit 249) and a second display unit (first dummy light-emitting unit 247 or second) capable of individually displaying predetermined information at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine. A switching number display unit (round display unit 242) having a dummy light emitting unit 248) and capable of displaying information on the number of switching using the first display unit and the second display unit,
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state, both the first display unit and the second display unit in a predetermined number of times display situation First special display control means for controlling the display of the switching number display section so that the predetermined information is displayed (refer to the stop result table shown in FIG. 41B in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81). A function to execute a round display start process based on the information identified by
When the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning and the special condition is satisfied, the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display unit in the number display situation. In this manner, special display control means for controlling the display of the switching number display unit so that the predetermined information is displayed on the second display unit (in FIG. 41 (d) in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81). A function of executing round display start processing based on information identified by referring to the stop result table shown),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 43, even when the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special game state winning, if the predetermined special condition is satisfied, the variable entry means is in the first special game state. In the same manner as described above, the opening / closing control is performed until the number of switching times reaches the first number. Thereby, when opening and closing in the variable pitching means is performed for the first number of times, it is determined to the player whether it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or because the special condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to make predictions, and monotonization of the game is suppressed.

  Further, when the special condition is satisfied as described above, the lottery mode by the lottery means maintains the previous lottery mode, so that the advantage of the first special gaming state is ensured and the special condition is satisfied. As a result, the lottery mode will not shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, so the player may be disadvantaged by the establishment of special conditions in the configuration where the monotonization of the game is suppressed as described above. Absent.

  Further, when opening and closing of the variable pitching means is executed when the gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state, both the first display unit and the second display unit in the switching number display unit in the number display situation In the case where the predetermined information is displayed at the time, the opening and closing of the variable pitching means is executed based on the establishment of the special condition, the first display unit and the second display unit in the switching number display unit in the number display situation. Predetermined information is displayed on the second display unit among the display units. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can see whether the opening / closing of the variable entry means corresponds to the transition to the first special game state or the establishment of the special condition by looking at the switching number display section. Judgment is possible.

  On the other hand, as described above, when the game state transitions to the first special game state, the opening and closing of the variable entry means is executed and the opening and closing of the variable entry means is executed based on the establishment of the special condition. In any case, the predetermined information is displayed on the second display unit. Therefore, even if the player looks at the switching number display section, it is determined whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It can be made difficult. If the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the special condition, if the display is clearly different from the transition to the first special gaming state on the switching count display section, the player By looking at the display section, it can be easily determined that the opening / closing of the variable pitching means does not correspond to the transition to the first special game state but corresponds to the establishment of the special condition. If it does so, the effect which suppresses the monotonization of the said game will lose | disappear or will be reduced. On the other hand, according to the present configuration, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game is suppressed from being lost or reduced, and the opening and closing of the variable pitching means is executed based on the establishment of the special condition. The effect which it did is exhibited suitably.

  Note that “a predetermined special condition is satisfied” includes a special lottery result in the lottery means or in a different lottery means.

  Means 44. The special opening / closing control means controls opening / closing of the variable pitching means until the number of switching times reaches the first number, and recognizes that the mode of the opening / closing control is the same as the first opening / closing execution state. A gaming machine according to claim 43, characterized by the above.

  According to the means 44, if the predetermined special condition is satisfied even if the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special game state winning, the variable entry means is in the first special game state. In the same manner as described above, the opening / closing control is performed until the number of switching times reaches the first number. Furthermore, the aspect of the opening / closing control at that time is such an aspect that it is recognized that it is the same as the first opening / closing execution state that occurs when shifting to the first special gaming state. Thereby, when opening and closing in the variable pitching means is performed for the first number of times, it is determined to the player whether it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or because the special condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to make predictions, and monotonization of the game is suppressed.

Means 45. A plurality of the second display units are provided,
The first special correspondence display control means is the number of times of switching in the case where the switching number display section is controlled to display based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state. The display state is controlled so that the display state of the display unit is one of the display states set as a plurality of types as the first special correspondence display state.
A plurality of display states set as the first special display state are set so that the predetermined information is displayed on the first display unit in all display states, and the first The predetermined information is displayed on at least a part of display states set as a plurality of special display states on each of the first display unit and at least a part of the plurality of second display units. 45. A gaming machine according to means 44, characterized in that a display state is included.

  According to the means 45, when the game state is shifted to the first special game state, the predetermined information is displayed on the first display part in the switching number display part whenever the variable entry means is opened and closed. Therefore, for the game hall manager, paying attention to the first display unit, the opening and closing of the variable entry means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state, or corresponds to the establishment of the special condition. Can be determined.

  Means 46. In the switching number display section, a first suggesting section indicating that the first display section corresponds to the first opening / closing execution state is adjacent to both the first display section and the second display section. The gaming machine according to any one of means 43 to 45, wherein the gaming machine is provided as described above.

  According to the means 46, since the first suggestion portion is provided so as to be adjacent to both the first display portion and the second display portion, the manager of the game hall confirms the first suggestion portion. By doing so, the position of the first display unit can be grasped, but it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the first display unit and the second display unit correspond to the first opening / closing execution state.

Means 47. As the special gaming state winning, at least a first winning and a second winning are set,
The first transition means shifts the gaming state to the first special gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first winning,
On the basis of the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the second winning, the variable pitching means or the variable pitching means different from the variable pitching means opens and closes until the number of times of switching reaches a predetermined second number. Second transition means for shifting the game state to the second special game state in which the second opening / closing execution state that is controlled to open / close by the control means occurs (a situation where the 15R probability change flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) With a function to execute the game state transition process)
In addition, the switching number display unit includes the first display unit and the second display unit, and a third display unit (multi-opening / closing light-emitting unit 246) separately from these,
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is the second winning, the predetermined information is displayed on both the third display unit and the second display unit in the number display situation. The second special correspondence display control means capable of controlling the display of the switching number display section (round based on the information specified by referring to the stop result table shown in FIG. 41 (a) in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81). A gaming machine according to any one of means 43 to 46, further comprising a function of executing a display start process.

  According to the means 47, when the opening / closing of the variable pitching means is executed when the gaming state shifts to the second special gaming state, the third display unit and the second display unit in the switching number display unit in the number display situation. Since the predetermined information is displayed on both of the display units, the manager of the game hall looks at the switching number display unit, so that the opening and closing of the variable entry means corresponds to the transition to the second special game state, Alternatively, it can be determined whether it corresponds to the establishment of the special condition.

  In this case, when the game state shifts to the first special game state, the variable ball entry means is opened and closed, and when the game state changes to the second special game state, the variable ball entry means opens and closes. In any case, the predetermined information may be displayed on the second display unit in the switching number display unit. Thus, for the player, when the opening / closing of the variable entry means is executed based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a special game state winning, the display indicating the number of times of switching is made. It is considered that the second display unit recognizes that the predetermined information can be displayed. In such circumstances, as described above, when opening / closing of the variable pitching means is executed based on the establishment of the special condition, since the predetermined information is displayed on the second display unit, the player views the switching number display unit. Even so, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition.

Means 48. A plurality of the second display units are provided,
The second special correspondence display control means sets the display state of the switching number display part when the lottery result of the lottery means displays the switching number display part based on the fact that the lottery result is the second winning. Display control to be one of the display states set as multiple types as the corresponding display state,
The display states set as a plurality of types as the second special correspondence display state are set so that the predetermined information is displayed on the third display unit in all display states, and the second The predetermined information is displayed on each of the third display unit and at least a part of the plurality of second display units in at least a part of the display states set as a plurality of special display states. 48. A gaming machine according to means 47, characterized in that a display state is included.

  According to the means 48, the predetermined information is always displayed on the third display part in the switching number display part whenever the variable entry means is opened and closed when the gaming state shifts to the second special gaming state. Therefore, for the game hall manager, paying attention to the third display unit, the opening and closing of the variable entry means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state, or corresponds to the establishment of the special condition. Can be determined.

Means 49. In the switching number display section, the first display section, the second display section, and the third display section are arranged side by side in an oblique direction, and the first display section is sandwiched between the first display section in the oblique direction. A display unit and the third display unit are disposed;
In the switching number display section,
The 2nd display part provided so that the 1st suggestion part which shows that the said 1st display part respond | corresponds to the said 1st opening / closing execution state was adjacent with respect to the said 1st display part and the said 1st display part And is disposed at a position that is above one side and the other side.
A second display unit provided with a second suggestion unit indicating that the third display unit corresponds to the second opening / closing execution state so as to be adjacent to the third display unit and the third display unit And is disposed at a position that is above one side and the other side.
Furthermore, the second display unit adjacent to the second suggestion part of the second suggestion part is located above or laterally relative to the second display part adjacent to the first suggestion part of the first suggestion part. 49. The gaming machine according to claim 47 or 48, wherein the positional relationship between the upper side and the side with respect to is set reversely.

  According to the means 49, the upper or lateral positional relationship of the first suggestion portion with respect to the second display portion is set reversely, and the upper or lateral positional relationship of the second suggestion portion with respect to the second display portion is set in reverse. For the player, it becomes difficult to distinguish which display unit in the switching number display unit corresponds to the first opening / closing execution state and which display unit corresponds to the second opening / closing execution state. For example, a player who is convinced that the third display unit corresponding to the second opening / closing execution state is disposed above the second suggestion unit is the first display unit disposed above the first suggestion unit. Although it is thought that it is a 1st display part corresponding to an opening / closing execution state, the said display part is a 2nd display part. Thereby, even if the player looks at the switching number display section, it is determined whether the opening and closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It becomes possible to make it difficult.

  Means 50. The gaming machine according to any one of means 43 to 49, wherein a plurality of the second display portions are provided.

  According to the means 50, since the plurality of second display portions are provided, the display mode of the information on the number of times of switching in the switching number display portion is diversified.

  When this configuration is applied to the means 48, at least part of the second display unit is arranged in the oblique direction together with the first display unit and the third display unit in the switching number display unit. In addition, the first display unit and the third display unit may be arranged so as to sandwich at least a part of the second display unit in the oblique direction.

Means 51. As the special gaming state winning, at least a first winning and a second winning are set,
The first transition means shifts the gaming state to the first special gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first winning,
Further, based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the second winning, until the variable pitching means or the variable pitching means different from the above is the second predetermined number of times of switching. Second transition means (a 15R probability change flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that shifts the gaming state to the second special gaming state where the second opening / closing execution state that is controlled to open / close by the opening / closing control means occurs at least. A function to execute the game state transition process in a situation where
Any of the means 43 to 50, wherein the first opening / closing execution state is set as a state in which it is harder for a game ball to enter the variable entry means than the second opening / closing execution state. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the means 51, the first opening / closing execution state and the opening / closing control mode are the same in the first opening / closing execution state and the second opening / closing execution state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable entry means. As can be appreciated, the variable pitching means is opened and closed based on the establishment of special conditions. This makes it possible to relatively reduce the benefits that the player can obtain when opening and closing the variable pitching means based on the establishment of special conditions. Therefore, it is possible to open and close the variable pitching means based on the establishment of the special condition while suppressing the influence on the game ball exit rate.

  It should be noted that “the state where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means” includes, for example, a configuration in which a single opening time is set short, and when the opening state is reached. The configuration that switches to the closed state based on the occurrence of the entrance of the open limit number of game balls includes a configuration in which the open limit number is set to be small.

  Further, instead of the configuration of the means 51, the following configuration may be applied. In other words, in the case where it has a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area at a predetermined launch period in accordance with a launching operation by the player, and the opening / closing control means is configured to open the variable pitching means In the configuration in which the variable pitching means is closed when the opening restriction period has elapsed, the first opening / closing execution is performed by making the opening restriction period in the first opening / closing execution state shorter than the firing cycle. A configuration may be adopted in which the entry of the game ball does not substantially occur when the variable entry means is opened and closed based on the state and the establishment of the special condition.

  In addition, it comprises a launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area at a predetermined launch cycle in accordance with a launch operation by the player, and the opening / closing control means is configured to open the variable pitching means In the configuration in which the variable ball entry means is in the closed state when any one of the passage of the open limit period or the entrance of the open limit number of game balls is satisfied, the variable opening means is in the closed state in the first opening / closing execution state. By making the opening restriction period shorter than the product of the firing period and the opening restriction number, the entry of the game ball is substantially reduced when the variable entry means is opened and closed based on the establishment of the first opening / closing state and the special condition. It is good also as a structure which is hard to produce automatically.

Means 52. Provided in the gaming area, provided with a starting ball entering portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming region can enter,
The lottery means performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the special gaming state based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the start ball entering unit,
Further, the starting entrance part can be switched between a non-accepting state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and an accepting state in which the game ball is easy to enter (main control device 81). A function for executing a power support process in the MPU 202 of
The acceptance control means is a switching mode for switching the starting and entering ball portion between the non-accepting state and the accepting state, and the opportunity for not entering the accepting state or entering the accepting state per unit time is relatively low. Having a frequency switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode with a relatively high opportunity to become the acceptance state per unit time,
The acceptance control means sets the switching mode to the low frequency switching mode based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state, and the special control mode 52. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 51, wherein even if the condition is satisfied, the switching mode until then is maintained.

  According to the means 52, when the special condition is satisfied in the situation where the switching mode is the low frequency switching mode, the subsequent switching mode is the low frequency switching mode as in the case of shifting to the first special gaming state. . Therefore, even if the player confirms the state of the starting pitching part when the variable pitching means is opened and closed for the first time, whether or not it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state, or It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the special condition is met.

Means 53. Provided in the gaming area, provided with a starting ball entering portion (upper operating port 33, lower operating port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming region can enter,
The lottery means performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the special gaming state based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the start ball entering unit,
Further, the starting entrance part can be switched between a non-accepting state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and an accepting state in which the game ball is easy to enter (main control device 81). A function for executing a power support process in the MPU 202 of
The acceptance control means is a switching mode for switching the starting and entering ball portion between the non-accepting state and the accepting state, and the opportunity for not entering the accepting state or entering the accepting state per unit time is relatively low. A frequency switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode in which the opportunity to enter the acceptance state per unit time is relatively high. Further, at least in the low-frequency switching mode, the lottery result by the lottery means is Even if the result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state is achieved, the switching mode until then is maintained, and even if the special condition is satisfied, the switching mode until then is maintained. The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 51.

  According to the means 53, in the situation where the switching mode is at least the low-frequency switching mode, the low-frequency switching mode is determined whether the special condition is satisfied or the first special gaming state is entered. Maintained. Therefore, even if the player has confirmed the state of the starting pitching part when the variable pitching means is opened and closed for the first time in the situation of at least the low-frequency switching mode, it will be changed to the first special gaming state. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether it corresponds to the transition or whether the special condition is satisfied.

Means 54. A game turning operation device (symbol display device 41) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
The game turn operation is started based on the fact that the lottery means has performed a lottery, and the game turn operation is ended in a state where a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means is obtained. The game turn operation control means (sound lamp control device) controls the game turn operation device so that the game turn operation of each game turn is performed in response to the lottery being performed by the lottery means. 82, the display control device 212),
With
The first transition means starts the first opening / closing execution state when the game round corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means being the special gaming state winning is completed,
The special opening / closing control means is configured to change the variable when the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning and the game times corresponding to the establishment of a predetermined special condition are completed. Opening and closing control of the entrance means is started,
The gaming device control means is configured such that the lottery result by the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state, and the game turn operation of the game turning operation device in the game round corresponds to the lottery result by the lottery means. Common control means for sharing the game-turning operation of the game-turning device in a game-play corresponding to the fact that a predetermined special condition has been established in the case where the special-game-state winning is not achieved ( The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 53, further comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S1903 and S1904 in the sound lamp control device 82).

  According to the means 54, the lottery result by the lottery means is for the game device in the game game corresponding to the transition to the first special game state, and the game device in the game game corresponding to the special condition established. The game replay operation may be common. Thereby, even if the player confirms the game turning operation of the gaming device when the variable pitching means is opened and closed for the first time, whether or not it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state, Alternatively, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the special condition is met.

Means 55. A lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and a lottery mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high or low Lottery means (function to execute information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, function to execute variation start processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
A variable pitching means (variable winning device 32) provided in a game area where the game ball flows down and capable of switching between an open state in which the game ball flowing down is easy to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter;
An opening / closing control means (a function for executing a big prize opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for performing an opening / closing control for switching to the closed state after the variable pitching means is opened;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special game state winning, the number of times the variable pitching means is switched to the closed state after becoming the open state is a first predetermined number of times. A first transition means for shifting the gaming state to a first special gaming state in which the lottery mode in the lottery means becomes the high probability mode. A function of executing a gaming state transition process in a situation where the implicit 2R probability change flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81;
A result display unit (first result display unit AS) for displaying information on the lottery result of the lottery means at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
A switching number display part (round display part RS) for displaying information on the number of times of switching at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state, the result display unit is controlled to display the first special correspondence information, and the first Information display control means for controlling the display of the switching number display unit so that the number of times information is displayed (various stop result setting processing, variable display time setting processing, variation end processing and round display processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) Function to execute the start process), and
With
The opening / closing control means sets the number of times of switching to the first number of times based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning and a predetermined special condition is satisfied. Special opening / closing control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable pitching means (a function of executing a special winning opening opening / closing process in a situation where a special out flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81),
The information display control means includes at least a part of the first number of times information or display contents included in the first number of times information when the variable pitching means is controlled to be opened and closed by the special opening / closing control means. Information is displayed on at least one of the result display unit or the switching number display unit, and the display mode in the result display unit and the switching number display unit on displaying the information is: Special display control means for making the lottery result by the lottery means different from the display mode in the result display section and the switching number display section when the result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state is obtained. In the situation where the special out flag is stored in the RAM 204 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, various stop result setting processes and variable display time setting processes The gaming machine is characterized in that a function) for executing startup processing variations termination process and the round display.

  In the gaming machine of the means 55, when the gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state, the first special correspondence information is displayed on the result display unit in the result display situation, so that the gaming hall that has seen it is displayed. The manager can grasp the transition to the first special gaming state, and further, the information for the first number of times is displayed on the switching number display part in the number of times display situation, so that the management of the game hall that has seen it The person can grasp the number of times of opening and closing the variable pitching means.

  In this case, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special game state winning, if the predetermined special condition is satisfied, the variable pitching means is the same as in the first special game state. The opening / closing control is performed until the number of times of switching reaches the first number. Thereby, when opening and closing in the variable pitching means is performed for the first number of times, it is determined to the player whether it corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or because the special condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to make predictions, and monotonization of the game is suppressed.

  However, when the variable pitching means is opened / closed based on the establishment of the special condition, the result display unit and the switching number display unit both display clearly different from the case of shifting to the first special game state. Then, the player sees the result display section and the switching number display section, so that the opening and closing of the variable pitching means does not correspond to the transition to the first special gaming state, but corresponds to the establishment of the special condition. It can be easily judged that there is. If it does so, the effect which suppresses the monotonization of the said game will lose | disappear or will be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the variable pitching means is opened / closed based on the establishment of the special condition, the first number of times information or information including at least part of the display contents included in the first number of times information is the result. It may be displayed on at least one of the display unit or the switching number display unit. As a result, even if the player sees the result display section and the switching number display section, the opening / closing of the variable entry means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the establishment of the special condition. It is possible to make it difficult to judge whether it is a thing.

  On the other hand, when the variable pitching means is opened / closed based on the establishment of the special condition, the display mode in the result display unit and the switching number display unit for displaying the information is the lottery result by the lottery unit. Is different from the display mode in the result display section and the switching number display section when the result corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state. Therefore, as described above, the game hall makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable pitching means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state or the satisfaction of the special condition. It becomes possible for the administrator of the system to be able to judge.

  Note that “a predetermined special condition is satisfied” includes a special lottery result in the lottery means or in a different lottery means.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  A lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and a lottery mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high or low A lottery means, a gaming device provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a gaming device control means for causing the gaming device to execute a predetermined operation so that a predetermined operation mode is visible from the front of the gaming machine; Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special gaming state winning, the game apparatus control means performs control so that the predetermined operation is executed in the gaming apparatus, and the lottery means in the lottery means A first transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a first special gaming state in which the mode is the high probability mode; and the lottery means at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine A special display unit that displays information corresponding to the lottery result, and an information display control unit that controls display of the special display unit, wherein the gaming device control unit determines that the lottery result by the lottery unit is the special game state winning unit. The gaming device is controlled so that an operation that is recognized as the same as the predetermined operation is executed in the gaming device based on the fact that a predetermined special condition is satisfied. When the game device is controlled by the special game device control means, the lottery mode by the lottery means is configured to maintain the previous lottery mode, and the information display control means includes: Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state, Is provided with switching control means for controlling the display of the special display unit so that special information is displayed after the state is switched to, and the switching control means has a lottery result obtained by the lottery means as the first special game. A state in which the special information is displayed on the special display unit based on the result corresponding to the transition to a state, after the state in which the gaming device is performing the predetermined operation is terminated. And maintaining the game device even if the game device is controlled by the special game device control means after that, it is possible to satisfactorily suppress a decrease in game motivation. Become.

  In addition, a lottery for whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and as a lottery mode, a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high and low A lottery means, a gaming device provided at a position visually recognizable from the front of the gaming machine, and a gaming device control for causing the gaming device to perform a predetermined operation so that a predetermined operation mode is visible from the front of the gaming machine And the game device control means performs control so that the predetermined operation is executed in the gaming device based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special gaming state winning, and the lottery means A first transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a first special gaming state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the lottery at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine. A special display unit that displays information corresponding to the lottery result of the means, and an information display control unit that controls the display of the special display unit, wherein the gaming device control unit is configured such that the lottery result by the lottery unit is the special game. The gaming device is operated so that an operation that is recognized as the same as the predetermined operation is executed in the gaming device based on the fact that a predetermined special condition is satisfied when the state is not won. A special gaming device control means for controlling, and when the gaming device is controlled by the special gaming device control means, the lottery mode by the lottery means is configured to maintain the lottery mode so far, and the information display control means Is based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state, in a predetermined special display situation, Based on the fact that the special display state is controlled and the lottery result of the lottery means is the special game state winning so that the special display portion is displayed so that the special information is displayed after the indication state becomes the switching state. A display state maintaining unit that maintains a display state of the special display unit in a state in which the special information is displayed in a state where the control of the gaming device by the gaming device control unit is not executed; As a result, it is possible to satisfactorily suppress the decline in gaming motivation.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting a wooden plate or the like to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is a rotation base end side and the right side is a rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion or a non-priority starting entering ball portion) 33, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion or a priority starting ball) Part) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display part 43, an accessory display part 44, and the like.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 24, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, 10 game balls are paid out when the general winning opening 31 is entered, and 15 game balls are paid out when the variable winning device 32 is entered. Is executed, three game balls are paid out when a ball enters the upper working port 33, and four game balls are paid out when a ball enters the lower working port 34. Is executed.

  The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, in order to increase the advantage of the lower working port 34 with respect to the upper working port 33, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the lower working port 34 larger than the number of payouts related to the upper working port 33. Further, in order to increase the advantage of the variable winning device 32 with respect to each operating port 33, 34, it is preferable to set the payout number related to the variable winning device 32 larger than the payout number related to each operating port 33, 34.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 33, the lower operation port 34, or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 33 is on the upper side. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  Details of the electric accessory 34a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A shows a case where the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state), and FIG. 5B is a state where the electric accessory 34a is in an open state (supported state or guide state). Shows the case.

  The working port case 33a constituting the upper working port 33 projects to the near side and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, with the upper side length <the lower side length. At this time, the upper side length of the working port case 33a (that is, the left-right width of the upper working port 33) is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower side length is when the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state. The length is longer than the distance between the left and right electric accessories 34a. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state, the interval between the two operation openings 33, 34 is set so that the distance between the operating port case 33a and the upper end of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Has been adjusted.

  According to the above configuration, in the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the lower operation port 34, and the electric operation item 34a is opened, so that the lower operation port 34 can be won. In particular, at this time, during the operation in which the electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state, the operating port case 33a of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, which becomes an obstacle. Until the accessory 34a is fully opened, it is impossible to win a game ball in the lower operating port 34, and it is possible to win only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully open. That is, the game ball that has dropped from above hits the side surface of the operating port case 33a and is bounced outward, and does not win the lower operating port 34 directly. As a result, when the electric accessory 34a is opened in a very short time, it is extremely difficult to win the lower working port 34, and only when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is continued, the lower working port 34 is opened. Winning is easy.

  In addition to the configuration in which the working port case 33a of the upper working port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, the working port case 33a of the upper working port 33 has a two-stage configuration with a narrow upper portion and a lower lower portion. A substantially C-shaped guide piece may be provided on both the left and right sides of the mouth 33, or a failure nail may be implanted obliquely below the working port case 33a.

  The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open / close door 32b that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a. The open / close door 32b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and a predetermined game ball is likely to win when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted when a big win or a special off-winning win is made. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling. In addition, on the upper surface of the decoration member 39, a part of the plurality of general winning ports 31 described above is installed in a state of being opened upward.

  The main display unit 43 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 6A is a longitudinal sectional view of the main display portion 43 and a region including the front side thereof, and FIG. 6B is a front view of the segment display 101 constituting the main display portion 43.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the main display unit 43 includes a segment display 101, a display substrate 102 on which the segment display 101 is mounted, and a cover panel 103 provided in front of the segment display 101. And.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the segment display 101 is provided with three display areas RS, AS, and BS side by side on its display surface. In these three display areas RS to BS, eight display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 are provided, respectively. Each of the display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 has individual light sources composed of LEDs, and the individual light sources are controlled to be turned on / off, so that only one arbitrary display segment is provided. Can be lit, and any combination of display segments can be lit. Accordingly, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed in the display areas RS to BS. Since each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8. .

  In the three display areas RS to BS, display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 are arranged so that a predetermined symbol can be displayed with the same size and the same shape. Specifically, for each display region RS, the first to seventh display segments R1 to R7 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments R1 to R7 are numbers. "1" to "9" and alphabets "F", "H", and "L" are arranged so as to be displayed at least. The eighth display segment R8 is a circular display segment, and is disposed on the side of the lower right portion of the region where the first to seventh display segments R1 to R7 are provided. Therefore, in the display area RS, “1” to “9” and “F”, “H”, “L”, “1.” to “9.”, “F.”, “H.”, “L”. . ”Can be displayed at least.

  In addition, as long as it is possible to individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols in the three display areas RS to BS, the shapes and arrangement modes of the display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 are arbitrary. Furthermore, instead of 8 segments, 7 segments, 9 segments, or the like may be used. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which a predetermined symbol is not displayed by the same magnitude | size and the same form. However, if it is possible to display a predetermined symbol with the same size and the same shape, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the display in the display areas RS to BS.

  Moreover, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 are the same, and different colors may be displayed for the display areas RS to BS. In any or all display areas RS to BS, the colors displayed in the display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 may be appropriately changed. Moreover, the structure which controls lighting or light extinction of each display segment R1-R8, A1-A8, B1-B8 by carrying out on-off control of the light source is not essential, and each display segment R1-R8, A1- If display control can be performed individually in A8, B1 to B8, a segment display device may be configured by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display.

  Furthermore, the segment display may not be applied to each display area, but the symbol may be displayed by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix.

  The three display areas RS, AS, and BS each have a function of clearly (or teaching) different information to the player and the manager of the game hall. Specifically, in the left display area RS, when the variable winning device 32 is in the opening / closing execution mode (or in the opening / closing execution mode) by winning the big win, the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode. This is a round display section RS for displaying the number of times that the special winning opening 32a is opened.

  The intermediate display area AS is a first result display section AS for notifying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 33. In this case, in the first result display section AS, the change display of the pattern by sequentially turning on and off the first display segment A1 to the eighth display segment A8 using the winning to the upper working port 33 as a trigger (or (Variable display or switching display) is performed, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is clearly indicated by the display as a stop result of the variable display. Note that the mode of the variable display is arbitrary. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, in relation to the round display part RS, it can be said that the first result display part AS is provided adjacent to the round display part RS. In other words, in relation to the round display part RS, it can be said that the first result display part AS is arranged in parallel with the round display part RS.

  The display area BS on the right side is a second result display section BS for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning in the lower working port 34. In this case, in the second result display unit BS, the variation display of the picture by sequentially turning on and off the first display segment B1 to the eighth display segment B8 using the winning of the lower working port 34 as a trigger (or (Variable display or switching display) is performed, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operation port 34 is clearly indicated by the display as a stop result of the variable display. Note that the mode of the variable display is arbitrary. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit BS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  On the front surface of the segment display 101, “R” is attached as a symbol for suggesting that it is a place where round display is performed at the lower position of the round display section RS, and the lower position of the first result display section AS. Is attached with a number “1” as a symbol for suggesting that it is a place for displaying the result of the lottery based on the winning to the upper operating port 33, and is located below the second result display section BS. A number “2” is assigned as a symbol for indicating that the lottery result is displayed based on the winning to the lower working port 34.

  Here, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started in the corresponding result display sections AS, BS until the above-described variable display is stopped in a state where a predetermined stop result is displayed. The following description will be made assuming that is one game time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single result display unit is provided, and even if any one of the operation ports 33 and 34 is won, the single game display is provided. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the result display unit, the variable display is started in the single result display unit, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed. Once.

  The segment display 101 having the above configuration is mounted on the display substrate 102 from the side opposite to the display surface. The display substrate 102 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, through electrical wiring, and when a drive signal is output from the main control device to the display substrate 102, each display segment R1-R8, A1- A8, B1 to B8 are turned on.

  The display substrate 102 on which the segment display 101 is mounted is configured such that the entire display units RS to BS of the segment display 101 are exposed on the front surface of the decoration member 39 through the opening 39 a provided in the decoration member 39. It is positioned and fixed from the back side of the decorative member 39.

  The opening 39 a of the decorative member 39 is closed by the cover panel 103 in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the segment display 101. The cover panel 103 is opposed to the entire display units RS to BS in the segment display 101, and the display on the display units RS to BS is visible through the window panel 62 and the cover panel 103 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is formed so as to be translucent. Specifically, the cover panel 103 is made of a synthetic resin and is formed to be black translucent. By making the cover panel 103 semi-transparent in this way, the display on each display unit RS to BS is more transparent than the configuration in which the cover panel 103 is formed colorless and transparent while making the display on each display unit RS to BS visible. Disappears. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract a player's attention to the display of the symbol display apparatus 41 mentioned later rather than the display in each display part RS-BS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover panel 103 may be formed to be colorless and transparent, or the cover panel 103 may be omitted.

  Although the detailed display by illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the accessory display part 44 has a segment indicator similarly to the main display part 43, and the said segment indicator is provided with the accessory result display part. Yes. The accessory result display unit is a display unit for displaying a result of an internal lottery performed based on winning through the through gate 35. In this case, in the result display section for an accessory, a display of variation (or variable display or switching display) of a picture is performed by sequentially turning on and off each display segment using a winning at the through gate 35 as a trigger. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 35 is clearly indicated by the display as a result of stopping the variable display. If the result of the internal lottery based on winning through the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the open state of the electric character, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the character result display unit and the variable display After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner. The accessory display unit 44 is not limited to the above-described configuration, and other configurations exemplified in the main display unit 43 may be applied, and a configuration different from the main display unit 43 may be applied. May be.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of symbols. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The center frame 42 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle, and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. That is, when the variable display is performed in the first result display unit AS, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly, and when the variable display is performed in the second result display unit BS, In addition, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display. Then, for example, the symbol display device 41 is set in advance as a game time for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds, in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  A first hold lamp portion (first hold display portion) 45 corresponding to the first result display portion AS and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operation port 33 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 45 is turned on. In addition, a second hold lamp portion (second hold display portion) 46 corresponding to the second result display portion BS and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 42. A maximum of four game balls won in the lower operation port 34 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed when the second reservation lamp unit 46 is turned on. As described above, since the upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first holding ramp portion 45 and the second holding ramp portion 46 is not hindered by the fall of the game ball. ing.

  Below the center frame 42, a third holding lamp portion 47 corresponding to the accessory result display portion of the accessory display portion 44 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by turning on the third holding lamp portion 47. In addition, the structure etc. by which each holding lamp | ramp parts 45-47 are displayed on a part of symbol display apparatus 41 may be sufficient.

  An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 53. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21. The game ball launching mechanism 53 is operated by operating a firing handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14. Operation is performed.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is colorless and transparent with glass, the window panel 62 is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent with synthetic resin.

  Around the window 61, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display lamp part 63 is provided above the window part 61 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 63, speaker units 64 are provided for outputting sound effects corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower pan 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through a passage forming unit 73 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 81 and an audio lamp controller 82 are mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 83 made of, for example. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other in a non-separable manner by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83. And by being connected inseparably by these box coupling | bond parts 85, when the internal space of the board | substrate box 83 is open | released, it has the structure which needs destruction of the said board | substrate box 83 or a part of excision. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the coupling process.

  The box coupling portion 85 can be applied to any configuration as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion 85, The box cover is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 The connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body are cut. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. Thereafter, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 83.

  A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the board box 83 and the mounting base are formed by the coupling pieces 86 and the coupled pieces 87. Between them.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a seal seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the pasted portion, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The sound lamp control device 82 includes a sound lamp control board that controls sound and lamp display and control of a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81. The sound lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 84 is configured to be accommodated.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism 92 and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the sound lamp control device 82, and the like from the rear. is doing.

  The payout mechanism portion 92 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. A payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism 92 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied and a power switch for turning on and off the power is provided.

  Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal plate 99 on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal plate 99 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. State transition such as an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a loan is made, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an opening / closing execution mode At this time (or during the transition to the state), an output terminal for outputting a signal is provided. And the signal regarding the state on the frame side is output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

  The control device assembly unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power source and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, fraud suppression means similar to the substrate box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the substrate box of the payout control device 97.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is configured such that a power source and launch control board is accommodated in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 54 is performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 includes a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. A RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211e, and the like are connected. In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. Also, as a part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211e, a winning winning entry portion (a payout corresponding entering portion) such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating opening 33, a lower operating opening 34, a through gate 35, and the like. Are connected to each other, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 performs a winning determination (entering determination) for each entering part. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a lottery occurrence lottery based on winning at the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, and also performs support generation lottery based on a winning at the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an audio lamp control device 82 are connected. For example, the payout control device 97 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to paying out a game ball is output and a winning to the upper operating port 33 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three gaming balls is output and sent to the lower operating port 34. When a winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the sound lamp control device 82. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the open / close door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, and a main display. The segment display 101 which comprises the part 43 is connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 202 so that the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric combination 34a is won, the MPU 202 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 34b so that the electric combination 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS in the segment display unit 101 is executed in the MPU 202, and the segment display unit is used in the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32. Display control of the round display unit RS in 101 is executed.

  Furthermore, an external output terminal plate 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202. In this case, the external output terminal plate 99 has a jackpot signal output terminal (first state signal output terminal) 99a and a jackpot and special out signal output terminal (second state signal) as output terminals for outputting a signal at the time of state transition. Output terminal) 99b.

  When the game result is a jackpot result, the MPU 202 can output a jackpot signal to the management control device on the game hall side through the jackpot signal output terminal 99a. Specifically, in a normal time, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal 99a, and when a jackpot result is obtained, an HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as will be described later, even if the winning / losing lottery result based on winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is not a big win, the variable winning device 32 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. A special loss result (that is, a small hit) is provided as one type of game result. In this case, when the game result is a jackpot result or when the game result is a special loss result, the MPU 202 sends a jackpot and special loss signal output terminal 99b to the management controller on the game hall side. It is possible to output jackpot and special off-line signals. Specifically, in normal times, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot and special loss signal output terminal 99b, and a HI level signal is output when a jackpot result or a special loss result is obtained. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

  The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply / launch control device 98, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 201 and the payout control device 97, and the generated operating power is indicated by a double line arrow. Supply through the route. The power source and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound lamp control device 82 controls the display control device 212 and controls the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81. is there.

  The display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 82. In this case, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the symbol combination display time on the symbol display device 41 and finally the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed based on various commands input from the main control device 81. The lottery of the presence / absence of reach and the contents of reach production is executed.

  Here, the display content of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the upper, middle and lower stages are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, the display screen G is configured such that 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be.

  In addition, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the fluctuation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when a 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated, The combination is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  In addition, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result to be described later, the variation display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state in which a combination of symbols with different numbers is formed, and then an explicit movie is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outlier result, which will be described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state where a combination of symbols with different numbers is formed, and thereafter , The common video is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the display of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 202 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a lottery in which a jackpot is generated, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the display device 41 fluctuates and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the big hit random number counter C1, a first result display section AS of the main display section 43, and The second result display unit BS and the variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time in the symbol display device 41 are used. We are and. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. The RAM 204 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 232 including a first result display area reservation area Ra, a second result display area reservation area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total number of reservations storage area. In the reserved ball storage area 232, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. It is designed to be stored.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C <b> 1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 221 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, as the success / failure table, the success / failure table for low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) in FIG. 10 (a) and the success / failure table for high probability mode in FIG. 10 (b) (high Probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  Moreover, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is an outlier result except for the random number value that is a big win, but in this pachinko machine 10, two types of special outlook results and normal outlook results are set as outlier results. Has been. These differences will be described later.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 29) and then returns to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34.

  Here, as an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 32 between the start and end of the opening / closing execution mode becomes relatively high. As described above, the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed 15 times (the number of times for high frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 30 sec (high frequency time) ) Or until the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 32a reaches 10 (high frequency). On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed twice (the number of times for low frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). Or until the number of winning prizes in the special winning opening 32a reaches 6 (the number of low frequency).

  In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 54 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is set so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. Drive controlled. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of one large winning opening 32a is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the one big winning opening 32a is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  Note that the number of opening / closing of the large winning opening 32a in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time (or opening limit period) for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are the same as those in the high-frequency winning mode. If the occurrence frequency of winning in the variable winning device 32 is higher than the low-frequency winning mode from when the opening / closing execution mode is started to when it is finished, the value is not limited to the above value. Is optional. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or if the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning to the variable winning device 32 does not substantially occur. It may be configured. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the open limit number is set shorter than the open limit time for one release, while in the low-frequency winning mode, It is good also as a structure which sets the product of the launching period of a game ball and the open limit number longer than open limit time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game balls and the opening time of one large winning opening 32a are not as described above, in the low-frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a winning to the variable winning device 32 is not substantially generated.

  As a support mode for the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34 is compared when the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 1/2) However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electrified open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more release is performed. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closure from the end of one open state until the start of the next open state is performed. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Has been.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize for the lower working port 34 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be given to the upper working port 33 than to the lower working port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 34 is connected to the lower working port 34. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning is made to the lower working port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in Further, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode may be set by making any one condition or any combination of conditions among the number of times, the opening time, and the winning probability different.

  The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The distribution destination of game results for the big hit type counter C2 (that is, the lottery result by the lottery determination and the distribution lottery) is stored in the distribution table storage area 222 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203 (distribution information). Group). Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the distribution table includes a distribution table (first distribution information group) for the first result display unit in FIG. 11A and a second result display unit in FIG. A distribution table (second distribution information group) is set.

  In the distribution table for the first result display section, as shown in FIG. 11A, as the distribution destination of the game result, the normal jackpot result (low-probability corresponding special game result), the unspecified 2R probability variable jackpot result (non- Explicit high-probability corresponding game result or latent probability variation state), explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result (explicit high probability correspondence game result or sudden probability variation result), 15R probability variation jackpot result (high probability special game result) Has been.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / not-lotting mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (special gaming state corresponding to low probability).

  The unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. is there. In other words, the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (non-explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the gaming state is shifted to the 15R probability variation jackpot state (a special gaming state corresponding to high probability).

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first result display unit, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” is unspecified. It corresponds to the 2R probability variation jackpot result, “15 to 19” corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and “20 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As described above, the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result are set as the probability variation jackpot result, thereby diversifying the mode of the probability variation jackpot result. That is, when the three types of probability variation jackpot results are compared, the advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high-frequency winning mode in the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest. Although the mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, the support mode has the second highest explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high-frequency support mode, and the support mode is the low-frequency winning mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. 2R probability variation jackpot result is lowest. Thereby, monotonization of a game is suppressed and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In particular, in the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / raising lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, but the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode as in the normal gaming state. Then, as a gaming state, it is possible to create a gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes a high probability mode even though the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is common to the low frequency support mode. It is possible to predict whether the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display section, as shown in FIG. 11B, only the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result are set as the game result distribution destination. Of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the game result distribution mode in the case of winning the jackpot is based on the winning win based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 and the winning to the lower operating port 34. It is different from the case of winning the jackpot based on.

  Here, regardless of whether the distribution table for the first result display section or the distribution table for the second result display section is used, the probability of a promiscuous jackpot result when the jackpot is won is the same. Yes. That is, in the distribution table for the first result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the 15R probability variation jackpot result is 20. ing. Further, in the distribution table for the second result display section, the number of values of the big hit type counter C2 assigned to the 15R probability variation big hit result is 20. Therefore, the probability that the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is determined based on whether or not a big win is won based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and a big winning win based on the winning to the lower working port 34. (Specifically, 2/3).

  However, if a big win is won based on the winning of the lower working port 34 and a probable big hit result is generated, a 15R probable big winning result is always obtained, whereas a big win is won based on the winning of the upper working port 33 and In the case of a probabilistic jackpot result, an unspecified 2R probable jackpot result or an explicit 2R probable jackpot result with a probability of 1/4, and a 15R probable jackpot result with a probability of 1/2. In other words, the probability of occurrence of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the most advantageous for the player among the probability variation jackpot results, is higher when the jackpot win is won based on the winning to the lower operation port 34. It will be higher than if you win a jackpot based on winning.

  In addition, in the unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result, the winning / raft lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends as described above, but the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. When compared with the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the opportunity to receive game balls is reduced by the fact that the electric accessory 34a is less likely to be in the open state, and further, based on the distribution table for the second result display section. The possibility that a lottery will be performed is reduced.

  As described above, the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 have a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Accordingly, the player plays a game while expecting that a prize will be generated in the lower working port 34 among the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, and accordingly, the frequency of winning in the lower working port 34. The player's attention to the high-frequency support mode that increases becomes higher.

  Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, as described above, when a result of losing is determined in the lottery, a result of normal losing or a special losing result is obtained. In this case, in the case of a normal losing result that occurs with a relatively high probability when the result is a losing result, the open / close execution mode is not shifted, and further, the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

  On the other hand, a special failure result that occurs with a relatively low probability when a failure result is obtained results in a special failure state. In the special losing state, the open / close execution mode is entered in a situation where the result of losing is determined in the lottery. However, the opening / closing execution mode of the transfer destination is the low-frequency winning mode. Therefore, even if the result is a special losing result, it is not possible to expect a game ball to be awarded to the big prize opening 32a. Further, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode do not shift.

  By setting the special loss result as described above, the opening of the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 can be used as an effect. Here, not in the opening / closing execution mode, but also in the normal gaming state where the winning / raising lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, if the result is a special outage result, the low frequency winning mode is executed. Only the mode is changed, and thereafter, the normal gaming state is restored. On the other hand, when the above-described implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode that is the low-frequency winning mode, and thereafter, the winning / raising lottery mode is high although the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. Probability mode. As a result, the occurrence of a special outage result under normal gaming conditions and the occurrence of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result will result in a transition to the opening / closing execution mode as the same low-frequency winning mode, and then the support mode becomes low-frequency support. In both cases, the difference between the two is that the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode in the former, whereas the high probability mode is in the latter. In other words, the occurrence of a special loss result under normal gaming conditions and the occurrence of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result are common to the behavior of each movable object such as the behavior of the variable winning device 32 and the behavior of the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34. However, only the internal lottery state is different. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode that is the low-frequency winning mode occurs under the normal gaming state, it is possible to imagine whether or not the winning lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode afterwards. It becomes possible to raise the degree of attention.

  When the winning / losing lottery mode is the low-probability mode, as shown in FIG. 10A, the number of random numbers resulting in the special loss result is two, as is the case with the random number winning the big hit. On the other hand, when the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), the random number value resulting from the special losing result is the special number in the low probability mode. It is one smaller than the number of random number values that will be the result of divergence. In this way, by reducing the number of random values that result in special outliers to be less than the number of random number values that are won in big hits in the high probability mode, the jackpot is greater than the probability that results in special outage in the high probability mode. The probability of winning can be increased. In addition, by setting the number of random numbers resulting in special outliers to be lower in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the probability of a special outage result in the high probability mode is lower than in the low probability mode. Can also be lowered.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is determined whether to generate a reach. However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is a high-frequency winning mode. In the game machine in which the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result in the game times to be, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started. This means a display state for making the player think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result in the previous stage.

  In other words, the combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be displayed is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may possibly be displayed, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol row in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents in FIG. 8 will be described in detail. First, in the state where the symbol variation display is finished in the upper symbol row Z1, and further in the state where the symbol variation display is finished in the lower symbol row Z3, any effective A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. Reach display. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The symbol variation display is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 41. . The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS and at the variation start time of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250), it returns to 0. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in an open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric accessory 34a is not controlled to be in an open state.

  As already described, the MPU 202 uses at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS to determine the variation display time in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. A variable display time table storage area 223 is used. Further, the MPU 202 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop results in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. However, the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is used for the determination.

<Configuration of the holding ball storage area 232>
Next, the configuration of the reserved ball storage area 232 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

  The first result display section holding area Ra stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 33. Is a reserved area for In addition, the second result display section holding area Rb displays the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the lower operating port 34. This is a reserved area for storing. Here, since the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb have the same configuration, the first result display area of the both reservation areas Ra and Rb will be described below. The configuration of the reserved area Ra will be described.

  The first result display area reservation area Ra includes four storage areas of a first area to a fourth area, and a reservation number storage area. Each storage area has a C1 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a C2 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and a C3 storage for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3. It consists of an area and more. With the four storage areas of the first area to the fourth area, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operation port 33 are stored on hold.

  The C1 storage area is composed of 2 bytes, and the jackpot counter C1 value of any of 0 to 599 is stored using the lower 10 bits of 0 to 9. The upper 6 bits of 10 to 15 in the C1 storage area are unused areas.

  The C2 storage area is composed of 1 byte, and the jackpot type counter C2 value of any of 0 to 29 is stored using the lower 5 bits of 0 to 4. The upper 2 bits of 5 to 7 in the C2 storage area are unused areas.

  The C3 storage area is composed of 1 byte, and one of the reach random number counters C3 of 0 to 238 is stored using all 8 bits of 0 to 7.

  The reserved number storage area is a storage area for storing the number of use of the storage area, that is, the number of the game balls won in the upper operation port 33 and held. The reserved number storage area is composed of 1 byte, and any value of 0 to 4 is stored using the lower 3 bits of 0 to 2. The upper 5 bits of 3 to 7 in the reserved number storage area are unused areas.

  In addition, in the reserved ball storage area 232, the total number of holds for storing information of the sum of the number of holds in the first result display area reservation area Ra and the number of holds in the second result display area reservation area Rb. A storage area is provided. The total reserved number storage area is composed of 1 byte, and any value from 0 to 8 is stored using lower 4 bits of 0 to 3. Of the total reserved number storage area, the upper 4 bits of 4 to 7 are unused areas.

  The execution area AE shown in FIG. 9 is stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb when the variable display of each result display section AS, BS is started. This is an area for moving each value. The execution area AE has the same configuration as the storage area for one of the result display area reservation areas Ra and Rb, that is, a C1 storage area having a 2-byte configuration, a C2 storage area having a 1-byte configuration, and a 1-byte configuration. And a C3 storage area.

<Various types of processing executed by main controller 81>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 advances the game in each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process activated when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically started by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S104, a winning process for the operating port accompanying winning in the operating ports 33, 34 is executed, and in addition, in a step S105, a winning process for winning in accordance with winning in the through gate 35 is executed. This timer interrupt process is terminated.

  The winning opening process for the operation port in step S104 and the through winning process in step S105 will be described below.

<Winning process for the working opening>
First, the winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S <b> 201, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operation port 33 whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start winning prize) in the upper operation port 33. If it is determined that the game ball has won the upper working port 33, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out three game balls is set. In subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the upper working port 33. In step S204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is read, and the start reserved storage number RaN stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). Thereafter, in step S205, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the main winning process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper working port 33, in step S206, whether or not the game ball has won the lower working port 34 (starting winning) corresponds to the lower working port 34. The determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor. If it is determined that the game ball has won the lower operation port 34, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls is set in step S207. In the subsequent step S208, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the lower operation port 34. In step S209, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). Thereafter, an information acquisition process is performed in step S205, and the main winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if both step S201 and step S206 are NO, that is, if the game ball has not won any of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, the main winning process is finished as it is.

  The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in an external output process S501 of a normal process described later.

  Here, the information acquisition process of step S205 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved start storages N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S209 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the corresponding result display unit hold area is set to 1 in step S302. In addition to the increment, the value stored in the total reserved number storage area in step S303 (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are used as the first storage area among the free storage area areas of the corresponding result display area reservation area. That is, the number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by 1 in step S302. Then, after turning on the holding lamp section of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the number of stored memories, this information acquisition process is terminated.

  That is, when RaN is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are stored in the free space in the first result display area reserved area Ra. The first storage area in the area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start pending storage number RaN incremented by 1 in step S302 is stored. Then, after turning on the first hold lamp portion 45 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the start hold storage number RaN, the information acquisition process is ended. The first hold lamp unit 45 is sequentially turned on from the left side. For example, if the start hold memory number RaN is 1, the first hold lamp unit 45 at the left end is turned on and the start hold memory number RaN is 4. If there is, the first hold lamp unit 45 up to the right end is turned on.

  If RbN is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are stored in the second result display area reserved area Rb. The first storage area in the area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start pending storage number RbN incremented by 1 in step S302 is stored. Then, after turning on the second hold lamp portion 46 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the start hold storage number RbN, the information acquisition process is ended. The second hold lamp unit 46 is sequentially turned on from the left side. For example, if the start hold memory number RbN is 1, the leftmost second hold lamp unit 46 is turned on and the start hold memory number RbN is 4. If there is, the second holding lamp portion 46 up to the right end is turned on.

<Winning winning process>
Next, the through winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. If it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35, the process proceeds to step S402, and it is determined whether or not the accessory reserve storage number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment).

  On the condition that the game ball wins the through gate 35 and that the accessory reservation storage number SN <4, the process proceeds to step S403, and the accessory reservation storage number SN is incremented by one. Subsequently, in step S404, the value of the electric utility product release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the electric utility reservation area 233 of the RAM 204. Then, after turning on the third holding lamp section 47 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the number of stored storage, the main winning process is terminated. The third hold lamp unit 47 is sequentially lit from the left side. For example, if the accessory reservation storage number SN is 1, the leftmost third reservation lamp unit 47 is turned on and the accessory reservation storage number SN is If it is 4, the third hold lamp portion 47 at the right end is turned on.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S401 that a game ball has won the through gate 35, or if it is determined in step S402 that the value of the reserved item storage number SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, the electric accessory release counter C4 The prize winning process is terminated without storing the value of.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S501 to S507 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S508 and S509 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S501, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. If an effect command such as a change start command, a type command, or a change end command is set, it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82.

  Next, in step S502, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In the subsequent step S503, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 97 are read. Thereafter, in step S504, game time control processing for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the result display sections AS and BS on the side performing variation display, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S504, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state transitions to the opening / closing execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In step S <b> 506, a power combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 34 a provided in the lower operation port 34 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is opened, display control of the combination display 44, and the like are performed. The details of the power combination support process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S507, it is determined whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. The random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps S508 and S509). That is, in step S508, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In step S509, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S501 to S506 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time. The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, whether or not the opening / closing execution mode flag (opening / closing execution state information information) is stored (stored) in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area (opening / closing execution state information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. judge. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When in the open / close execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processes after step S602, that is, the game times starting process of steps S603 to S605 and the game times progressing process of steps S606 to S609. End control processing. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S602 whether the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS is in a variable display. This determination is made as to whether or not the variable display flag (variable display information) is stored (stored) in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. This is done by judging. The variable display flag is stored when variable display is started for either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

  When the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn start process in steps S603 to S605. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S603, it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN is “0”. The case where the common hold number CRN is “0” means that the start hold storage number is “0” for both the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34. Therefore, the game times control process is finished as it is. If the common hold number CRN is not “0”, the data stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area Rb is set for variable display in step S604. In step S605, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is performed, and then the game number control process is terminated.

  Here, the data setting process in step S604 and the change start process in step S605 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is “0”. When the second start reserved memory number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S702 to S706 is executed, and when the second start reserved memory number RbN is not “0”. Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S707 to S711.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit BS. If stored, the data stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether or not the first start reservation storage number RaN is 1 or more. I made it. Thereby, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display hold area Ra and the second result display hold area Rb, the second result display hold area corresponding to the lower operation port 34. The hold information stored in Rb is prioritized.

  In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S702, the first reserved storage number RaN of the first result display unit reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In subsequent step S703, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S704, the data stored in the first area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

  After that, in step S705, a process for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. Then, one of the first holding lamp portions 45 that is lit is extinguished. In this turn-off process, contrary to the above-described turn-on process, the first hold lamp unit 45 is turned off sequentially from the right side.

  In the subsequent step S706, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If it is stored, it is erased, and if it is not stored, its state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the start of the current variation display is the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  In the data setting process for the second result display section, first, in step S707, the second reserved storage number RbN of the second result display section reserved area Rb is decremented by one. In the subsequent step S708, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S709, the data stored in the first area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the storage area of 2nd result display part holding | maintenance area Rb in step S710 is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. Then, one of the second on-hold lamp portions 46 that is lit is extinguished. In this turn-off process, contrary to the turn-on process, the second holding lamp unit 46 is turned off in order from the right side.

  In subsequent step S711, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If not stored, the second result display section flag is stored, and if stored, the state is maintained. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variation start process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the high probability mode flag (high probability state information) is stored (stored) in the high probability mode flag storage area (high probability state information storage means) provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. Determine whether. The high probability mode flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot result, and is erased when a normal jackpot result occurs thereafter.

  If it is not the high probability mode, in step S802, the determination is made with reference to the determination table for the low probability mode. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success / failure table for the low probability mode as shown in FIG. 10 (a). It is determined whether or not. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, whether or not it is determined is determined in step S803 by referring to a high probability mode determination table. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success / failure table for the high probability mode as shown in FIG. 10 (b). It is determined whether or not.

  After the process of step S802 or step S803, in step S804 to step S812, a process for setting the game result of the current game round is executed, and in the current game round, the first result display unit AS or the first (2) A process for setting a stop result when the variable display executed in one of the result display units BS is ended is executed. In this case, when setting the stop result, various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 224 as stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203 are referred to.

  Here, the stop result table will be described with reference to FIG. 21A is a stop result table for explicit 2R probability change, FIG. 21B is a stop result table for non-explicit 2R probability change, and FIG. 21C is a stop result table for 15R probability change. FIG. 21D is a normal jackpot stop result table, FIG. 21E is a special miss stop result table, and FIG. 21F is a normal miss stop result table.

  Information on the stop result is stored in advance in the ROM 203 as stop result data. Each stop result data is not set only with the content of the stop result (that is, the lottery result information) to be displayed when the variable display in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS ends. The contents of the number of rounds (that is, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening 32a or the number of times of switching of opening and closing of the variable winning device 32) to be displayed on the round display unit RS when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the number of times of switching) Information) is also set. That is, in each stop result data, the content of the stop result in the result display unit and the content of the number of rounds in the round display unit RS are set as a pair.

  As the stop result data, a plurality of data of data 1 to data 12 is stored. Among these data 1 to 12, data 1 and data 2 are stop result data for explicit 2R probability change, data 3 and data 4 are stop result data for implicit 2R probability change, data 5 and data 6 is stop result data for 15R probability change, data 7 and data 8 are usually stop result data for big hits, data 9 and data 10 are stop result data for special outage, and data 11 and data 12 are This is stop result data for normal removal. That is, a plurality of stop result data is set for each game result.

  It is not essential that two pieces of stop result data are set for one game result. Even if the number of pieces of stop result data set for a game result is different for each game result. It may be different in a predetermined combination.

  The stop result table for explicit 2R probability change, the stop result table for unspecified 2R probability change, the stop result table for 15R probability change, and the stop result table for normal jackpot each include the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and stop result data. Is stored. Specifically, the address of the stop result data is stored in association with the value of the jackpot type counter C2. On the other hand, the correspondence relationship between the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the stop result data is stored in each of the special outage stop result table and the normal outage stop result table. Specifically, the address of the stop result data is stored in association with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1.

  For details of each stop result table, as shown in FIG. 21A, the stop result table for explicit 2R probability change is set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the explicit 2R probability change jackpot result. Among “15-19”, “15-17” corresponds to the stop result data of data 1, and “18-19” corresponds to the stop result data of data 2. In this case, in the stop result data of data 1, the content of the number of rounds is “2”, and the content of the result display is “5”. Further, in the stop result data of data 2, the content of the number of rounds is “2”, and the content of the result display is “7”. That is, in the stop result table for the implicit 2R probability change, the contents of the result display include a number and the contents of the number of rounds also include a number.

  In the stop result table for the implicit 2R probability change, as shown in FIG. 21B, among the “10 to 14” set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the implicit 2R probability change jackpot result, “10 to 12” corresponds to the stop result data of data 3, and “13 to 14” corresponds to the stop result data of data 4. In this case, in the stop result data of data 3, the content of the number of rounds is “2”, and the content of the result display is “5.”. Further, in the stop result data of data 4, the content of the number of rounds is “2”, and the content of the result display is “7.”. That is, in the stop result table for the implicit 2R probability change, the contents of the result display include a number and the contents of the number of rounds also include a number.

  Here, as described above, the case where the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs is a case where a game ball is won in the upper operating port 33 and the jackpot is won in the lottery. Therefore, the contents of the result display corresponding to the data 1 to data 4 are set only in the first result display part AS among the first result display part AS and the second result display part BS.

  In the stop result table for 15R probability change, as shown in FIG. 21C, among “10 to 29” set as the value of the big hit type counter C2 corresponding to the 15R probability change big hit result, “10 to 19” "Corresponds to the stop result data of data 5, and" 20 to 29 "corresponds to the stop result data of data 6. In this case, in the stop result data of data 5, the content of the number of rounds is “F”, and the content of the result display is “L”. Further, in the stop result data of data 6, the content of the number of rounds is “F”, and the content of the result display is “H”.

  Here, as described above, when the 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the game ball wins the upper working port 33, and the game ball wins the lower working port 34 when the game ball wins in the winning or failing lottery. In either case, the winning lottery is either a big win. Among these, in the latter, since “10-29” is set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result data of the data 5 or the stop result data of the data 6 Either one is selected. On the other hand, in the former, since “20 to 29” is set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, only the stop result data of the data 6 is selected. Therefore, the content of the result display corresponding to the data 6 can be set in either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, whereas the content of the result display corresponding to the data 5 is Of the first result display part AS and the second result display part BS, only the second result display part BS is set.

  In the normal jackpot stop result table, as shown in FIG. 21 (d), "0 to 4" among "0 to 9" set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the normal jackpot result. Corresponds to the stop result data of data 7, and “5 to 9” corresponds to the stop result data of data 8. In this case, in the stop result data of data 7, the content of the number of rounds is “F”, and the content of the result display is “L.”. Further, in the stop result data of data 8, the content of the number of rounds is “F”, and the content of the result display is “H.”.

  Here, as described above, when a normal jackpot result occurs, a game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and a game ball wins the lower operation port 34 when the game ball wins in the winning / losing lottery, One of the cases where the winner was won in the lottery. Therefore, the contents of the result display corresponding to the data 7 and the data 8 can be set in either the first result display part AS or the second result display part BS.

  In the special outage stop result table, “157” out of “157,457” set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the special outage result is data as shown in FIG. 9 corresponds to the stop result data of “9”, and “457” corresponds to the stop result data of data 10. In this case, in the stop result data of data 9, the content of the number of rounds is not set (that is, the light is turned off), and the content of the result display is “2”. Further, in the stop result data of the data 10, the content of the number of rounds is “.”, And the content of the result display is “2.”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B, the special loss result is set so that the success / failure lottery mode can be generated in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Among these, in the former, since “157,457” is set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a special outage result, either the stop result data of the data 9 or the stop result data of the data 10 is selected. The On the other hand, in the latter case, since “157” is set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a special loss result, only the stop result data of the data 9 is selected.

  Further, the special losing result can be generated in any of the game times based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 and the game times based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 34. Therefore, the contents of the result display corresponding to the data 9 and the data 10 can be set in either the first result display part AS or the second result display part BS.

  In the normal outage stop result table, as shown in FIG. 21 (f), among the values set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the normal outage result, the corresponding value of 299 or less Corresponding to the stop result data, the corresponding value of 300 or more corresponds to the stop result data of the data 12. In this case, in the stop result data of the data 11, the content of the number of rounds is not set (that is, the light is turned off), and the content of the result display is “−”. In the stop result data of the data 12, the content of the number of rounds is not set (that is, the light is turned off), and the content of the result display is “-.”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10 (a) and FIG. 10 (b), the normal losing result is set so that the success / failure lottery mode can occur in either the low probability mode or the high probability mode. 1, either stop result data of data 11 or stop result data of data 12 is selected. In addition, the normal losing result can be generated in any of the game times based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 and the game times based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 34. Therefore, the contents of the result display corresponding to the data 11 and the data 12 can be set in either the first result display part AS or the second result display part BS.

  As described above, different display contents are set for every game result regardless of whether or not a big hit occurs. As a result, when the game round is ended, the manager of the game hall can select the result display section in which the variable display related to the game round is performed among the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. By watching, it is possible to monitor what the game result of the game times is. In particular, since the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS provided in the main display unit 43 are display units that are directly controlled by the main control device 81, the sub display control device 212 performs display control. The display reliability is higher than that of the display unit which is interposed at the time.

  On the other hand, the contents of the number of rounds are common to “2”, which is the number of times that the big prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened, in the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result. Probability jackpot results and normal jackpot results are common to “F”. Thereby, the manager of the game hall, when the content of the stop result displayed on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS when the game round ends is based on the jackpot result, By looking at the display content of the round display section RS, it is possible to monitor the number of times the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is subsequently opened. In particular, since the round display unit RS provided in the main display unit 43 is a display unit that is directly displayed and controlled by the main control device 81, the round display unit RS is included in the display unit that the sub display control device 212 intervenes during display control. In comparison, the display reliability is high.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 20), after the process of step S802 or step S803, it is determined in step S804 whether the lottery result in step S802 or step S803 is a big win. In the case of a big win, in steps S805 to S811, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a big win are executed.

  In step S805, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second result display unit flag is not stored, in step S806, distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit (see FIG. 11A). Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is a numerical range of a normal jackpot result, a numerical range of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, a numerical range of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, a 15R probability variation jackpot Determine which of the resulting numerical ranges is included.

  On the other hand, if the second result display unit flag is stored, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second result display unit (see FIG. 11B) in step S807. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the normal jackpot result or the numerical range of the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

  After the process of step S806 or step S807, it is determined in step S808 whether or not the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a probability variation jackpot result. If it is a probable jackpot result, in step S809, any stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the current game round in which a probable jackpot result will occur. Execute the stop result setting process for probability variation jackpot to set whether to end the variable display at.

  The stop result setting process for probability variation big hit will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a 15R probability variation jackpot result. Here, as already described, in the distribution table for the first result display section, as the probability variation jackpot result, a plurality of types of game results including an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result. However, in the distribution table for the second result display section, only one type of 15R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result. Therefore, in the case where the current game time is based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 33 and the game result is distributed in the distribution table for the first result display unit. In step S901, a negative determination may be made or an affirmative determination may be made. On the other hand, when the current game time is based on the winning of a game ball to the lower operating port 34 and the game result is distributed in the distribution table for the second result display section In step S901, an affirmative determination is always made.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined in step S902 whether or not the distributed game result is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. If the result is an explicit 2R probability change jackpot result, the stop corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the stop result table for the explicit 2R probability change already described in step S903. The address information of the result data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 in step S904. Thereafter, in step S905, after storing (storing) the explicit 2R probability variation flag (explicit high probability correspondence information) in the explicit 2R probability variation flag storage area (explicit high probability correspondence information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, The stop result setting process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S902, in step S906, the stop result table for the implicit 2R probability change described above is referred to and the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is handled. The address information of the stop result data obtained is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 in step S907. Thereafter, in step S908, the implicit 2R probability variation flag storage area (implicit high probability correspondence information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 is stored (stored). ), The stop result setting process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, in step S909, the stop corresponding to the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the stop result table for 15R probability change already described. The address information of the result data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 in step S910. After that, after storing (storing) the 15R probability variation flag (high probability correspondence special information) in the 15R probability variation flag storage area (high probability correspondence special information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 in step S911, this stop The result setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 20), after executing the process of step S809, the process proceeds to step S813. On the other hand, if the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is not a probability variation jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S808, and the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, referring to the normal jackpot stop result table already described, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is acquired, and the address information is obtained. The result is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S811, the normal big hit flag (low probability correspondence special information) is stored (stored) in the normal big hit flag storage area (low probability correspondence special information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, and then this stop The result setting process ends. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S813.

  If the lottery result in step S802 or step S803 is not a big win, a negative determination is made in step S804, and the flow proceeds to step S812. In step S812, for the off time for setting which stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the current game round that results in a losing result, and the variable display is ended. Execute the stop result setting process.

  The stop result setting process for detachment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. If it is not the high probability mode, a special outage determination is made as to whether or not the current game result is a special outage result with reference to the success / failure table for the low probability mode in step S1002. Specifically, does the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE match the value set as a special outage result in the low probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. 10 (a)? Determine whether or not. On the other hand, if the mode is the high probability mode, in step S1003, the determination is made with reference to the determination table for the high probability mode. Specifically, does the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE match the value set as a special outage result in the high probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. 10 (b)? Determine whether or not.

  Thereafter, in step S1004, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1002 or step S1003 is a special loss result. In the case of a special outage result, in steps S1005 to S1007, processing for setting a game result in the case of a special outage result, processing for setting a stop result, and the like are executed.

  In step S1005, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the special outage stop result table described above, and in step S1006. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. After that, in step S1007, the special outage flag (special outage correspondence information) is stored (stored) in the special outage flag storage area (special outage correspondence information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204, and then this stop result setting is performed. The process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1004, the stop corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to in step S1008 with reference to the normal outage stop result table already described. The address information of the result data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 in step S1009. Thereafter, the stop result setting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 20), after executing the process of step S812, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, a variable display time setting process for setting the variable display time of the current game time in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS is executed.

  The variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer of the RAM 204 is acquired and stored in the register of the MPU 202. In a succeeding step S1102, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the non-explicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, and the special loss flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1102 as the occurrence of reach display. Even if none of the above flags is stored, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the occurrence of reach display is generated. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1102.

  If a positive determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1103, it is determined whether the game result of the current game round is an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result. In the case of either the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or the special outlier result, the common variation display time table (common variation display time information group) stored in the variation display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 in step S1104 Referring to this, the variable display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired, and in step S1105, the variable display time information is stored in the variable display time counter area (in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204). Set to variable display time measuring means). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the case of a special loss result under the normal gaming state and in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the behavior of the variable winning device 32 and the behavior of the electric accessory 34a of the lower operating port 34 The behavior of each movable object is common, and only the internal lottery state is different. In this case, in both cases of a special outlier result and an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, a reach display will occur in the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41, and further, the variation of the game number By referring to the common variation display time table when determining the display time, the variation display time of the pattern in the result display unit and the symbol display device 41 becomes common.

  On the other hand, if the game result of the current game round is neither an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result, a negative determination is made in step S1103, and the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, by referring to the other variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203, the variable display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired, and in step S1107. The variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, the common hold number CRN is grasped. In a succeeding step S1109, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support flag (high frequency support information) is stored (stored) in the high frequency support flag storage area (high frequency support information storage means) in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. To do. The high-frequency support flag is stored or deleted when the open / close execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process described later.

  If the high frequency support flag is not stored, in step S1110, the current change is referred to by referring to the variable display time table for low frequency support stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. Fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the type counter CS and the number of common pending numbers CRN is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 204 in step S1111. Thereafter, the setting process ends. Note that the variable display time is set to be shorter as the number of the common hold number CRN is larger.

  On the other hand, if the high frequency support flag is stored, in step S1112, the variable display time table for high frequency support stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is referred to this time. Fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS and the number of common pending numbers CRN is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 204 in step S1113. Thereafter, the setting process ends. Note that the variable display time is set to be shorter as the number of the common hold number CRN is larger.

  As described above, when reach display does not occur, a special outage result is obtained under normal gaming conditions by changing the variable display time table to be referenced depending on whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. When the result is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the result display unit in the subsequent game times and the pattern change display time in the symbol display device 41 are common.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 20), after step S813, a variation start command and a type command are set in step S814. The change start command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time. The type command includes game result information. In other words, the type command includes 15R probability variation jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, special outage result information, etc. included.

  The variation start command and type command set in step S814 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect in the game times based on the received variation start command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of this effect include the variation display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The determined variation display mode of the symbol is output from the voice lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Is done. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on the display content command received from the sound lamp control device 82 so that the symbol change display corresponding to each game time is performed.

  After that, in step S815, the variation display of the pattern is started in the result display unit corresponding to the current game time out of the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS. In this case, when the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 204, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the first result display unit AS, and the second result display unit flag is set. If stored, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the second result display unit BS. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 18), when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S606 to S609 is executed. In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S606, it is determined whether or not the current game time fluctuation display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 is “0”. The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 24) as described above. The set value of the variable display time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S607. In the variable display process, display control is performed on the result display unit (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display unit according to the current game round. . As for the first result display section AS, for example, the first display segment A1 → the second display segment A2 →... → the seventh display segment A7 → the eighth display segment A8 → the first display segment A1 → In this order, the display segments A1 to A8 blink. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S608. Here, the variation end process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. In the following step S1202, stop result data corresponding to the address information confirmed in step S1201 is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the result display is determined from the specified stop result data. Check.

  In a succeeding step S1203, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second result display section flag is not stored, the contents display section confirms that the result display confirmed in step S1202 is output to the first result display section AS in step S1204. Thereby, in the 1st result display part AS, the change display of a picture is complete | finished in the state by which the result display concerning the said output was stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when the second result display unit flag is stored, the content display unit confirms the result display confirmed in step S1202 in step S1205, and then ends this variation end process. To do. As a result, in the second result display section BS, the variation display of the pattern is terminated in a state where the result display related to the output is stopped.

  Here, the result display stopped and displayed on the first result display unit AS in step S1204 and the result display stopped and displayed on the second result display unit BS in step S1205 are game time control in the next game time. The process is maintained until the change start process in step S605 is executed. That is, the MPU 202 maintains the content of the result display that is stopped and displayed on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS when one game round is completed until the next game round is started. As described above, each result display section AS, BS has a function of controlling display.

  The contents of the result display in the stop result data store information on display segments to be lit in the eight display segments A1 to A8 and B1 to B8. In this case, since the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS are both configured using eight display segments A1 to A8 and B1 to B8, the stop result data is first The result display part AS and the second result display part BS do not need to be set individually, and can be set as common.

  In the game times control process (FIG. 18), after executing the change end process, a change end command is set in step S609. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished. The change end command set in step S609 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). The sound lamp control device 82 ends the effect in the game round based on the received variation end command. Further, the change end command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the change end command, thereby confirming and displaying the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round ( Final stop display).

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process of step S505 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S1303 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the non-explicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, or the special loss flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, an opening / closing execution mode start process is executed in step S1304. In the start process, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without opening the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is set for opening in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, opening waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In this case, the waiting time information that is set differs depending on whether the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the waiting time information indicates that the waiting time information is lower in the low-frequency winning mode than in the high-frequency winning mode. It is set to be shorter. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 1 sec. In the low frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 0.2 sec. Is set. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed.

  In subsequent step S1305, a round display start process for informing the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the round display start process, first, address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display section RS displays information about the round related to the output. The contents of the number of rounds in the stop result data store information on display segments to be lit in the eight display segments R1 to R8.

  In a succeeding step S1306, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the 15R probability variation flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If it is not the high-frequency winning mode, that is, if it is the low-frequency winning mode, “2” is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1307. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened. On the other hand, if the high-frequency winning mode is set, “15” is set in the first round counter area RC1 in step S1308.

  After executing the process of step S1307 or step S1308, an opening command is set in step S1309. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This opening command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. Based on the received opening command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of this effect include the display mode on the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the sound lamp control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display corresponding to the current open / close execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  In the subsequent step S1310, after executing the external signal setting process, the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not any of the explicit 2R probability variation flag, the non-explicit 2R probability variation flag, the 15R probability variation flag, or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, and any one of the flags is stored. In this case, the signal output state of the jackpot signal output terminal 99a is set to the jackpot signal output state. Thereby, when the jackpot signal output terminal 99a is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, a jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the jackpot is generated in the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. I can understand that.

  Further, in the external signal setting process, it is determined whether any of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the non-explicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, or the special out flag is stored in the RAM 204. When the flag is stored, the signal output state of the jackpot and special out signal output terminal 99b is set to the jackpot and special out signal output state. Thereby, when the jackpot and special miss signal output terminal 99b is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot and special miss signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. It is possible to grasp that the opening / closing execution mode has occurred.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, and the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, a big winning opening / closing process is executed in step S1312. Here, the special winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 32a is being opened. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 32c. If the big winning opening 32a is not open, it is determined in step S1402 whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”, and in step S1403, the value of the first timer area T1 is “0”. Is determined.

  When the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” or when the value of the first timer area T1 is not “0”, the big prize winning opening / closing process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” and the value of the first timer area T1 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1404, and variable prize driving is performed to open the big prize opening 32a. The unit 32c is set in a driving state.

  In subsequent step S1405, setting processing for each round is executed. The setting process for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency winning mode is set. In the case of the high-frequency winning mode, in step S1502, the first timer area T1 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 has “15000” ( That is, 30 sec) is set. The count value set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is started, that is, every 2 msec. In the subsequent step S1503, “10” is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to count the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 32a. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  If it is not the high-frequency winning mode, that is, if it is the low-frequency winning mode, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer area T1 in step S1504, and the winning counter area is subsequently set in step S1505. Set “6” on the PC. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  After executing the setting process for each round in the big winning opening / closing process (FIG. 27), an opening command is set in step S1406, and the big winning opening / closing process ends. The set release command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This release command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. Based on the received release command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the special winning opening is open, the process advances to step S1407 to determine whether or not the value of the first timer area T1 is “0”. If the value of the first timer area T1 is not “0”, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 32a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 32. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by 1 in step S1409, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is “0” in step S1410. If it is not “0”, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If the value of the first timer area T1 is “0” in step S1407, or if the value of the winning counter area PC is “0” in step S1410, it means that the big prize opening closing condition is satisfied. . In such a case, in step S1411, the variable winning drive unit 32c is set to a non-driven state so as to close the special winning opening 32a.

  In the following step S1412, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and in step S1413, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0”, it is determined in step S1414 whether the high-frequency winning mode is set.

  In the case of the high-frequency winning mode, “1000” (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer area T1, and in the case of the low-frequency winning mode, “100” (that is, 0. 0) is set in the first timer area T1. 2 sec) is set. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the time during which the large winning opening 32a is closed between rounds is set shorter than in the high frequency winning mode. Thereafter, a closing command is set in step S1417, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set closing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This closing command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. Based on the received closing command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

  If it is determined in step S1413 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”, an ending start process is executed in step S1418. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round is set for the ending in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In this case, the waiting time information that is set differs depending on whether the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the waiting time information indicates that the waiting time information is lower in the low-frequency winning mode than in the high-frequency winning mode. It is set to be shorter. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 1 sec. In the low frequency winning mode, the count value of the standby time information is set so that the standby time is 0.2 sec. Is set. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed.

  Then, after setting an ending command in step S1419, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 17). This ending command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. Based on the received ending command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of this effect include the display mode on the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the sound lamp control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display corresponding to the current open / close execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 26), after executing the big prize opening / closing process in step S1312, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” in step S1313. In step S1314, it is determined whether the ending standby time has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S1315. Here, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability variation flag or the explicit 2R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any flag is stored, in step S1602, a flag erasing process for erasing information for specifying the gaming state is executed. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and when they are not already stored, the states are maintained. In the subsequent step S1603, the high probability mode flag is stored, and in step S1604, the high frequency support flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

  If it is determined in step S1601 that both the 15R probability variation flag and the explicit 2R probability variation flag are not stored, it is determined in step S1605 whether the implicit 2R probability variation flag is stored. If the implicit 2R probability change flag is stored, the flag erasure process is executed in step S1606. Thereafter, in step S1607, after storing the high probability mode flag, the present transition process is terminated. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  If it is determined in step S1605 that the implicit 2R probability variation flag is not stored, it is determined in step S1608 whether the normal jackpot flag is stored. If the normal jackpot flag is stored, the flag erasing process is executed in step S1609. After that, in step S1610, the high frequency support flag is stored, and in step S1611, “100” is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and then the transition process is finished. . As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode is ended when the number of game times continues 100 times, and thereafter, a transition is made to a normal game state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. The number of high-frequency support continuations (restricted number of games) is not limited to 100 times, and may be 1 or more and less than 100 times, such as 10 times, 20 times, or 30 times, or 101 times or more. May be.

  If it is determined in step S1608 that the normal jackpot flag is not stored, the migration processing is terminated as it is. In other words, when the result is a special losing result and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state of the game times resulting in the special losing result is maintained after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 26), after the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S1315 is terminated, a round display termination process is performed in step S1316. In this process, the display control of the round display unit RS is terminated so that the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43 is turned off. That is, the round display in the round display unit RS is started when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and is ended when the opening / closing execution mode is ended. In this case, when the opening / closing execution mode is the low frequency winning mode, the number of times of opening / closing the large winning opening 32a is smaller and the opening time and closing time of the large winning opening 32a are set shorter than in the high frequency winning mode. . Therefore, the period during which the content of the number of rounds is displayed on the round display portion RS is shorter than that in the high-frequency winning mode. Furthermore, the result display that is stopped and displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS is started when the game round ends, and is continued until the next game round is started. Therefore, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the result display starts before the content of the number of rounds is displayed on the round display unit RS and after the display of the content of the number of rounds is finished. Will continue. That is, the result display is maintained for a longer period than the display of the content of the number of rounds.

  Thereafter, in step S1317, after executing the opening / closing execution mode termination processing, the gaming state transition processing is terminated. In the open / close execution mode end processing, if the explicit 2R probability change flag, the unspecified 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, the normal jackpot flag, and the special out flag are stored, they are erased and are not already stored. If so, keep that state.

<Telephone support processing>
Next, the electric role support process in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a supporting flag is stored in a supporting flag storage area provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The in-support flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in an open state, and is erased when the state is returned to a closed state.

  If the in-support flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1702 to determine whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open state is won in the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored.

  If the support winning flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1703 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is “0”. If the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the main role support process is terminated.

  If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, it is determined in step S1704 whether it is the end timing of the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 or not. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1705, after setting the out-of-line display, the main role support process is ended. By setting the out-of-display, the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 is terminated in a state where the out-of-display is stopped.

  If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0” and it is not the end timing of the variable display, it is determined in step S1706 whether or not the value of the accessory reserved storage number SN is greater than “0”. When the value of the stored item reservation memory number SN is “0”, the main character support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the stored item storage number SN is larger than “0”, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in step S1707, and whether or not the high frequency support mode is determined in step S1708. .

  If it is not the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode, an open lottery is performed in step S1709. Specifically, when the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the winning lottery is selected. Become. At the same time as the open lottery, “750” (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer area T2. The second accessory timer area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started.

  In subsequent step S1710, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1709 is a support winning. If it is not a support win, the process proceeds to step S1712 without executing the process of step S1711. If it is a support win, a support win flag is stored in step S1711 and provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. After setting “3” in the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S1712.

  In step S1712, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1712, the main role support process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1712, it is determined in step S1713 whether or not the game number counter area is “0”. The game number counter is decremented by 1 every time one game time is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If the game number counter area is not “0”, the main role support process is terminated. If the game number counter area is “0”, the high frequency support flag is erased in step S1714, and then the main role support process is terminated.

  If it is in the opening / closing execution mode or not in the high frequency support mode, an open lottery is performed in step S1715. Specifically, when the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the winning lottery is selected. Become. Simultaneously with the open lottery, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer area T2.

  In the subsequent step S1716, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1715 is a support winning. If the support is not won, the main role support process is terminated. In the case of support winning, the support winning flag is stored in step S1717, and “1” is set in the second round counter area RC2, and then the main role supporting process is terminated.

  When the support winning flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, and the process proceeds to step S1718 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”. When the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, since the variation display of the picture on the accessory display unit 44 is being performed, the main character support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, a win display is set in step S1719. As a result, the display of the variation of the pattern in the accessory display unit 44 is terminated in a state where the winning display is stopped. In the subsequent step S1720, the supporting flag is stored, and after the support winning flag is deleted, the main role support processing is terminated.

  If the in-support flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1721, and after executing the electric combination opening / closing process for opening / closing the electric combination 34a, the electric combination support process is terminated. The electric role opening / closing control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. If the electric accessory 34a is opened, the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”.

  When the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1803 to perform a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state, and the second timer area T2 is set to “250” (that is, 0.5 sec). ) Is set.

  Thereafter, in step S1804, after the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated, and when the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”, the supporting flag is deleted. After that, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the electric accessory 34a is being opened, an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, and the flow proceeds to step S1807. In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the second timer area T2 is “0”. When the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If the second timer area T2 is “0”, an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the opened state is executed in step S1808.

  Thereafter, it is determined in step S1809 whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode, and in step S1810, it is determined whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode is set, “800” (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1811, and then the electric utility opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is in the opening / closing execution mode or not in the high frequency support mode, after setting “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) in the second timer area T2 in step S1812, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. .

<Command Corresponding Process Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 82>
Next, command response processing executed by the sound lamp control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the command response processing is executed periodically (for example, 2 msec) by the sound lamp control device 82.

  First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not a change start command and a type command have been received from the main controller 81. If a change start command and a type command have been received, whether or not information indicating that either an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result occurs is included in the received type command in step S1902. Determine whether. When either an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outlier result occurs, in step S1903, the common effect content table is referred to correspond to the information of the variation display time included in the variation start command. The contents of the effect are determined, and the contents of the effect are set in step S1904. Thereafter, the command corresponding process is terminated.

  In this case, the production contents include the light emission mode of the display lamp unit 63 and the output mode of the speaker unit 64, and the symbol variation mode in the symbol display device 41. The symbol variation mode includes symbol variation display time, presence / absence of reach display, reach display start timing, type of reach effect, final stop symbol combination information, and the like. Each game time effect is executed according to the effect content set in step S1904. Among these, the pattern variation mode in the symbol display device 41 is transmitted to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on the display content command received from the sound lamp control device 82 so that the symbol change display corresponding to each game time is performed.

  Here, in the case where the result is a special loss result as described above and the case where the result is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, by referring to the common effect content table, the change in the symbol on the symbol display device 41 when both game results are obtained. It is possible to share the display mode. Specifically, it is possible to share the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 41, the reach effect, the combination of symbols that are finally stopped and displayed, and the like. By the way, in this pachinko machine 10, in the case of a special outlier result and in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, a combination of symbols with the same number is not stopped and displayed with a different number. The displayed symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In this case, the combination of symbols is a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed even when the result is a normal off result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a combination of symbols for common display that is not stopped and displayed in the case of a result that is not normal.

  As described above, by sharing the symbol variation display mode, the behavior of the variable winning device 32 and the lower operation port 34 are obtained in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result in a normal gaming state or a special outage result. In addition to the common behavior of each movable object such as the behavior of the electric accessory 34a, the behavior in the display for production is also common. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode that is the low-frequency winning mode occurs under the normal gaming state, it is possible to make the player imagine whether or not the success / failure lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode thereafter. Become.

  As already described, when the 15R probability variation jackpot result is reached, the combination of symbols with the same odd number is stopped and displayed, and when the normal jackpot result is obtained, the same even number is assigned. The displayed symbol combination is stopped and displayed. However, in the former, after the combination of symbols with the same even number is once stopped and displayed, the combination of symbols with the same odd number is given in the game round or in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode. It is good also as a structure which can produce the effect which switches the content of a stop display. Furthermore, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, a combination of symbols with different numbers is stopped and displayed in a different manner from the case of a special outlier result and the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result. .

  On the other hand, if the game result of the current game round is neither an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result, a negative determination is made in step S1902, and the process proceeds to step S1905. In step S1905, with reference to the other effect content table, the effect content corresponding to the information of the change display time included in the change start command is determined, and the effect content is set in step S1906. Thereafter, the command corresponding process is terminated.

  The other effect content tables may be different for each game result, or some or all of them may be common. Moreover, you may change the production content table to refer by whether the support mode of the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operating port 34 is a high frequency support mode. In this case, in the normal gaming state, when the result is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result, the symbol variable display mode on the symbol display device 41 in the subsequent game times is made common. Is possible. Further, the effect content table to be referred to may be changed depending on whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this case, for example, by changing the contents of the reach display that is easy to select between the low probability mode and the high probability mode, an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result is obtained under the normal gaming state. In this case, it becomes possible to slightly change the display variation pattern of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 in the subsequent game rounds, and whether or not the high probability mode is determined from the contents of the reach display generated in the symbol display device 41. Can be predicted by the player. However, even in this case, the variable display time may be the same in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and in the case of a special outlier result.

  If no change start command and type command have been received, it is determined in step S1907 whether an opening command has been received. If an opening command has been received, the opening process is set in step S1908, and then the command response process is terminated. When setting the opening effect, the effect contents set for the high-frequency winning mode are different from those for the low-frequency winning mode.

  Specifically, in the case of the high-frequency winning mode, the opening contents in the opening / closing execution mode are set. In this case, an opening video is set as the display content of the symbol display device 41. Further, in the case of the low frequency winning mode, the effect contents for the opening / closing execution mode in the low frequency winning mode are set. In this case, as a display content of the symbol display device 41, a series of moving images are set from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It should be noted that the setting of the moving image only needs to be at least common in the case of the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the case of the special outlier result. In the case of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, different movie settings are performed. Also good.

  If no opening command has been received, it is determined in step S1909 whether an ending command has been received. If an ending command has been received, after setting an ending effect in step S1910, the command response process is terminated. The setting of the ending effect is performed only in the high-frequency winning mode. In this case, an ending video is set as the display content of the symbol display device 41.

  If an ending command has not been received, other setting processing is executed in step S1911, and then this command response processing is terminated. In other setting processing, for example, when an open command or a close command is received, the content of the effect corresponding to the open command and the content of the effect corresponding to the close command are provided on the condition that it is a high-frequency winning mode. Set up. When the change end command is received, the command is transmitted to the display control device 212 so that the stop result that has already been stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displayed.

<About the display on the main display unit 43>
Next, the situation in the case of a special loss result and the situation in the case of an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. In addition, in order to compare and explain the display content of the main display unit 43 in the case of a special outlier result and the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, in the following description, the first result display of the main display unit 43 Of the part AS and the second result display part BS, the state of the variable display of the pattern in the first result display part AS will be described.

  First, the situation when a special loss result is described.

  By executing the variation start process based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 at the timing t1, the symbol display on the symbol display device 41 is started, and the first display of the main display unit 43 is started. In the result display section AS, the display of the variation of the pattern is started. Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 is stopped and displayed at the timing t2, which is the timing before the variation display time of the current game time.

  After that, at the timing of t3, the variation display time of the current game time elapses, so that the variation display in the first result display section AS is stopped in a state where the result display corresponding to the special outage result is displayed, In the symbol display device 41, the combination of symbols already stopped and displayed is confirmed. In addition, at the timing of t3, as the display for the opening / closing execution mode in the symbol display device 41, the common display set in common for the special outage result and the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is started, and the main display unit Round display is started in the 43 round display section RS. However, in this special loss result, since the content of the round display is not displayed, the round display portion RS is turned off. Thereby, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 33A, the display content on the main display unit 43 is in a state where the round display unit RS is turned off, and the first result display unit AS is “2”. It will be displayed. The opening / closing execution mode after the special losing result is a low-frequency winning mode in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened twice, and the number of opening of the large winning opening 32a is not displayed in the round display section RS. However, in the first result display section AS, a symbol corresponding to the special losing result and a symbol corresponding to the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened is displayed.

  Actually, the display start timing of the result display in the first result display section AS is earlier than the display start timing of the round display in the round display section RS, but the player visually recognizes the main display section 43. In the case recognition, it is recognized that the display start timings of both are almost the same.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4 and the timing of t5, the special winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed. At the timing of t6, when the current opening / closing execution mode ends, the common display for the opening / closing execution mode that has been displayed on the symbol display device 41 ends, and the round display in the round display section RS Is terminated. In addition, since the round display part RS is turned off this time, the state is maintained. However, the result display in the first result display section AS is continued as it is.

  In addition, since this opening / closing execution mode is an opening / closing execution mode based on the result of the special losing result, at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode are in the state of the game times having the special losing result Maintained. The game times that have resulted in this special outage result are maintained in the normal gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

  After that, at the timing of t7, the next game round is started, whereby the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 is started, and the symbol variation display on the first result display section AS is started.

  Next, the situation in the case of an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result will be described.

  By executing the variation start process based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 at the timing t8, the symbol display on the symbol display device 41 is started, and the first display of the main display unit 43 is started. In the result display section AS, the display of the variation of the pattern is started. Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 is stopped and displayed at the timing t9, which is the timing before the variation display time of the current game time.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, the variation display time of the current game time elapses, and the variation display in the first result display section AS is stopped in a state where the result display corresponding to the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is displayed. At the same time, the symbol display device 41 confirms and displays the combination of symbols that are already stopped. At the timing t10, the common display is started as the display for the opening / closing execution mode in the symbol display device 41, and the round display is started in the round display section RS of the main display section 43. Thereby, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 33B, the display content on the main display unit 43 is in a state where “2” is displayed on the round display unit RS, and the first result display unit AS displays “ 5. "is displayed. The opening / closing execution mode after the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is a low-frequency winning mode in which the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened twice, and the number of opening of the big winning opening 32a is set in the round display section RS. Corresponding symbols are displayed, and a symbol corresponding to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is displayed in the first result display section AS.

  Actually, the display start timing of the result display in the first result display section AS is earlier than the display start timing of the round display in the round display section RS, but the player visually recognizes the main display section 43. In the case recognition, it is recognized that the display start timings of both are almost the same.

  After that, at the timing of t11 and the timing of t12, the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed. Then, at the timing of t13, the current opening / closing execution mode is ended, so that the common display for the opening / closing execution mode displayed so far on the symbol display device 41 is ended, and the round display in the round display section RS is displayed. Is terminated. However, the result display in the first result display section AS is continued as it is.

  In addition, since the current open / close execution mode is an open / close execution mode based on the result of the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode when the open / close execution mode ends. However, the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t14, the next game round is started, whereby the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 is started and the symbol variation display on the first result display section AS is started.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  If the lottery result of the winning or failing lottery in the main control device 81 is a jackpot winning prize, an implicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is set as a kind of jackpot result to be distributed. After the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is executed in the variable winning device 32, the winning lottery mode shifts to a gaming state in which the high probability mode is set. When the result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained, the result display unit (specifically, the first result display unit AS) of the main display unit 43 provided in the game area is used. By displaying the non-explicit 2R probability change information corresponding to the result, the manager of the game hall who has seen it can grasp that the game state is shifted to, and further, the round display part RS of the main display part 43 Since the 2R information is displayed as information on the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed, the manager of the game hall who sees it can grasp the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, there is assumed an act of improperly accepting a large amount of game balls by improperly performing the variable winning device 32 in spite of the fact that the jackpot result is not achieved. Specifically, the fraudulent act is performed by fraudulently with respect to the display control device 212 so that the display content on the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the opening / closing execution mode related to the high-frequency winning mode. By opening the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 with the inserted fraud jig, an act of illegally receiving a large amount of game balls is assumed. In addition, when executing the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode based on the special out-of-game result or the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the open state of the big winning opening 32a is set by an improper jig inserted in the game area. By maintaining it, an act of illegally receiving a large amount of game balls is assumed. On the other hand, the result display section and the round display section RS that are directly displayed and controlled by the main control device 81 display the lottery result information and the information on the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed. For the administrator, it is possible to satisfactorily monitor whether the pachinko machine 10 is being cheated.

  In this case, even when the lottery result of the above-mentioned winning or failing lottery is not a big win, if the result is a special loss result, the variable winning device 32 is the same as the case where the unspecified 2R probability variable big hit result is obtained. The opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is executed. As a result, when the variable winning device 32 is executed in the low-frequency winning mode open / close execution mode, it is based on the result of the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, or the result of the special loss result. It is possible to make the player predict whether the game is based or not, and the monotonization of the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, in the case of a special outage result, since the previous lottery mode is maintained in the winning / failing lottery mode, the advantage for the player that the result is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot is guaranteed, and the special lottery mode is guaranteed. Since the winning / failing lottery mode does not shift from the high probability mode to the low probability mode due to the result of the losing result, the player becomes a special losing result in the configuration in which the monotonization of the game is suppressed as described above. Will not be penalized.

  However, if the variable prize-winning device 32 is opened or closed based on the result of the special losing result, if the display is clearly different from the case of the unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result on the main display unit 43, By viewing the main display unit 43, the player does not correspond to the fact that the opening / closing of the variable prize-winning device 32 has resulted in an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, but to correspond to a special outage result. It can be easily judged. If it does so, the effect which suppresses the monotonization of the said game will lose | disappear or will be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed based on the result of the special losing result, the number “2” which is the same symbol as the 2R information is displayed on the result display unit of the main display unit 43. Information including is displayed. Thereby, even if the player looks at the main display unit 43, it corresponds to the fact that the opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 corresponds to the result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot or the result of the special loss. It is possible to make it difficult to judge whether it has been done.

  On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed based on the result of the special losing result, the above-described implicit 2R probability change information is displayed on the result display section, and the 2R information is displayed on the round display section RS. No display state occurs. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable prize winning device 32 corresponds to the result of an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot or the result of a special loss result. In this way, it is possible for the manager of the game hall to make a judgment.

  When the opening / closing execution mode is executed based on the result of the special losing result, information including the number “2”, which is the same symbol as the 2R information, is displayed in the result display unit instead of the round display unit RS. Therefore, for the game hall manager, the opening / closing of the variable prize-winning device 32 corresponds to an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result, or a special outage result. In order to ascertain whether or not, the round display unit RS may be confirmed, and the confirmation can be performed satisfactorily.

  When the result is an unexplicit 2R probability variation jackpot, the number “2” is displayed as the 2R information, and the number “2” is also displayed when the result is a special outlier. For the player who recognizes that the number “2” is displayed when the probable jackpot result is obtained, the round display portion is displayed when the opening / closing execution mode is executed based on the result of the special outage. In RS, even if a number “2” is displayed in the result display section, it is easy to determine that it corresponds to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result.

  The result display period in which the result information is displayed in the result display part includes the entire number display period in which the information on the number of times of switching is displayed in the round display part RS. As a result, when an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained, the player confirms that the display of the above-mentioned implicit 2R probability variation information on the result display unit and the display of 2R information on the round display unit RS are performed at the same time. There is an opportunity to do. Then, it is difficult for the player who has confirmed the state of the display to determine which of the result display unit and the round display unit RS indicates the number of times the variable winning device 32 is switched. Then, when the player performs the opening / closing execution mode based on the result of the special loss result, the number “2” displayed on the result display unit is the same as when the unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained. It is thought that it becomes easy to judge that.

  Since the first result display section AS and the round display section RS are arranged in parallel, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the two. On the other hand, even if a game ball wins to the lower operation port 34 corresponding to the second result display portion BS, an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result does not occur. That is, when an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained, the implicit 2R probability variation information is not displayed on the second result display unit BS, and the implicit 2R probability variation information is displayed on the first result display unit AS. Therefore, in order for the player to predict whether the opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 corresponds to an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special loss result, It is considered that the result display unit BS is not noticed. Therefore, it is preferable that the first result display unit AS of the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS is juxtaposed with the round display unit RS. In addition, although the structure which arrange | positions round display part RS between 1st result display part AS and 2nd result display part BS is also considered, it is 1st result in the point which gathers the area | region which displays the information of a game result. It is preferable to arrange the display part AS and the second result display part BS in parallel.

  In addition, since the first result display section AS and the round display section RS are composed of a display device having a common configuration, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between them.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display content on the main display unit 43 in the case of an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the display content on the main display unit 43 in the case of a special outlier result are different from those in the first embodiment. . Therefore, this different configuration will be described below. FIG. 34 (a) shows a stop result table for implicit 2R probability change, FIG. 34 (b) shows a stop result table for special outage, and FIG. 34 (c) shows an implicit 2R probability change big hit result and special outage result. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the main display part 43 in FIG.

  The display segments R1 to R8, A1 to A8, and B1 to B8 of the round display unit RS, the first result display unit AS, and the second result display unit BS in the main display unit 43 are the same as those in the first embodiment. And an individual light source made of LEDs. However, in the present embodiment, the individual light source is a multicolor light emitting type LED, and is configured to be able to emit light of a plurality of types of colors. Specifically, at least red as the first display color, pink as the second display color, and white as the third display color are set. Note that the display colors are not limited to three, and may be two or more, and may be two, four, or five. Further, the first display color is not limited to “red” and is arbitrary, the second display color is not limited to “pink”, and the third display color is “white”. It is not limited and is arbitrary. Furthermore, the light source is not limited to the LED as long as it can emit light of a plurality of types of colors.

  The content of the stop result data stored in the ROM 203 of the main control device 81 is different from that in the first embodiment. The contents of the stop result data will be described below for the case of an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the case of a special outlier result.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, three types of data A, data B, and data C are set as stop result data in the case of an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. In these data A, data B, and data C, the contents of the number of rounds in the round display part RS and the contents of the stop result in the first result display part AS or the second result display part BS are set as a pair. Yes.

  Of the “10-14” set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the implicit 2R probability change jackpot result, “10-11” is the stop of the data A in the stop result table for the implicit 2R probability change Corresponding to the result data, “12” corresponds to the stop result data of data B, and “13 to 14” corresponds to the stop result data of data C. In this case, in the stop result data of data A, the content of the number of rounds is “1” of the first display color, and the content of the result display is “2” of the second display color. Further, in the stop result data of data B, the content of the number of rounds is “1” of the first display color, and the content of the result display is “.” Of the first display color. Further, in the stop result data of data C, the content of the number of rounds is “2” of the first display color, and the content of the result display is “2” of the third display color.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 34B, three types of data D, data E, and data F are set as stop result data in the case of a special outage result. In these data D, data E, and data F, the contents of the number of rounds in the round display part RS and the contents of the stop result in the first result display part AS or the second result display part BS are set as a pair. Yes.

  Of the “57, 257, 557” set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the special outage result, “57” corresponds to the stop result data of the data D in the special outage stop result table. “257” corresponds to the stop result data of the data E, and “557” corresponds to the stop result data of the data F. In this case, in the stop result data of the data D, the content of the number of rounds is “2” of the second display color, and the content of the result display is “2” of the first display color. Further, in the stop result data of the data E, the content of the number of rounds is “3” of the third display color, and the content of the result display is “2.” of the first display color. Further, in the stop result data of the data F, the content of the number of rounds is “3” of the third display color, and the content of the result display is “2.” of the third display color.

  That is, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode based on winning the jackpot, the round display unit RS of the main display unit 43 displays the number of times the large winning port 32a is opened in the low-frequency winning mode. A number “2”, which is a symbol corresponding to the value of, is displayed in the first display color. On the other hand, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode based on the result of the special loss result, the round display portion RS of the main display unit 43 is opened with the large winning opening 32a in the low frequency winning mode. The number “2”, which is a symbol corresponding to the value of the number of times of display, is displayed in a display color different from the first display color. As a result, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), the round display unit RS corresponds to the value of the number of times the big winning opening 32a is opened in the low-frequency winning mode in the unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special out-of-game result. Because the display color will be different while including the above-mentioned symbols, it is difficult for the player to discriminate whether the unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result has occurred or the special outlier result has occurred. Can be made distinct.

  In the result display of the data C in the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the number “2” of the first display color is displayed on the round display portion RS, and the third display color “3” is displayed on the first result display portion AS. The number “2” is displayed. If it does so, it will become difficult for the player who saw the said display in the main display part 43 to distinguish which round display part RS or 1st result display part AS has shown the frequency | count of opening of the big winning opening 32a. Then, in the result display of the data E or data F in the special outlier result, the number “2” of the third display color is displayed on the round display portion RS. Then, when the low-frequency winning mode open / close execution mode is executed, it is distinguished whether it corresponds to an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outlier result. Can be made difficult for the player.

  Further, the first result display section AS (or the second result display section BS) of the main display section 43 in the case of a special outage result corresponds to the value of the number of times that the big winning opening 32a is opened in the low-frequency winning mode. The number “2” is included. As a result, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), when at least a special outage result is obtained, both the round display part RS and the first result display part AS (or the second result display part BS) receive the above-mentioned big prize. Since the number “2” that is a symbol corresponding to the value of the number of times the mouth 32a is opened is included, the value of the number of times of opening is emphasized. Then, for the player or the like, it is distinguished which of the round display part RS and the first result display part AS (or the second result display part BS) displays the value of the number of times that the big winning opening 32a is opened. It becomes difficult. If it can be distinguished which one of the round display part RS and the first result display part AS displays the value of the number of times of opening, it is difficult for the player to determine whether an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result has occurred. Although it becomes easy to distinguish whether it has occurred, according to this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish.

  In particular, in the result display of the data C in the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the number “2” of the first display color is displayed on the round display portion RS and the third display color “3” is displayed on the first result display portion AS. The number “2” is displayed. If it does so, it will become difficult for the player who saw the said display in the main display part 43 to distinguish which round display part RS or 1st result display part AS has shown the frequency | count of opening of the big winning opening 32a. Then, in the result display of the data E in the special outlier result, the number “2” of the third display color is displayed on the round display part RS, and the number “2” of the first display color is displayed on the first result display part AS. A number is displayed. That is, in the point that the number “2” of the first display color is displayed, the round display portion RS in the case of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and the first result display portion AS in the case of the special outlier result. In addition to being common and displaying the number “2” in the third display color, the first result display portion AS in the case of an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the round display portion RS in the case of a special outlier result And in common. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is executed, whether it corresponds to an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outlier result? This makes it difficult for the player to make a distinction.

  On the other hand, the display color of the result display displayed on the round display unit RS as described above is different between the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special outlier result, and the first result display unit AS (or the second result display). The display color of the result display displayed on the part BS) is different between the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special loss result. Therefore, it becomes possible for a game hall manager or the like to distinguish between a case where an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs and a case where a special outlier result occurs.

  In particular, in the round display portion RS in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the number “2”, which is a symbol corresponding to the value of the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened in the low-frequency winning mode, is always displayed first. Displayed in color. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode is executed, the game hall manager determines whether or not the number “2” is displayed in the first display color on the round display unit RS. What is necessary is just to confirm, and it becomes possible to make a good distinction between a case where an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs and a case where a special outlier result occurs.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display content on the main display unit 43 in the case of a special loss result is different from that in the first embodiment. Therefore, this different configuration will be described below.

  In the first embodiment, the display content for the special outage result is set as the display in the round display unit RS of the main display unit 43. However, in the present embodiment, the display content for the special outage result is Not set. That is, when the result is a special loss result and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the setting of the display content in the round display unit RS is not actively performed. However, during the opening / closing execution mode that results in a special loss result, the display content set in the previous opening / closing execution mode shifted based on the big win is maintained in the round display section RS. Such a situation arises because the processing configuration of the game state transition processing is different from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, the gaming state transition process (in the above first embodiment, FIG. 26) in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S2002, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is completed, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the process for turning off the round display is executed in step S2004. Here, the process for turning off the round display will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the process for turning off the round display, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not a special out flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the special out flag is not stored, in step S2102, the third timer area T3 serving as the extinguishing waiting period measuring means provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is set to "100" ( That is, 0.2 sec) is set. The value of the turn-off waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed. In subsequent step S2103, after the turn-off process of the round display section RS is executed, the main turn-off process is terminated. On the other hand, if the special out flag is stored, the process for turning off the light is terminated without executing the processes in steps S2102 and S2103.

  In other words, when the result is a jackpot result including an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the contents displayed on the round display section RS are once erased, whereas the special miss result Thus, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the content displayed on the round display section RS is not erased. In addition, the specific time of the light-off waiting time is arbitrary, and if the manager of the game hall can recognize that the round display part RS is turned off, it is set shorter or longer than the above time. Also good.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 35), after the process for turning off the round display is executed in step S2004, the start process of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S2005. In the start process, as in the first embodiment, an opening waiting time is set for waiting for the opening in the opening / closing execution mode without starting the opening of the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32. . However, the waiting time for opening (waiting period for start) set here is set longer than the waiting time for turning off (lighting waiting period) in both the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode. Yes.

  In a succeeding step S2006, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. If it is not the high-frequency winning mode, that is, if it is the low-frequency winning mode, “2” is set in the first round counter area RC1 of the RAM 204 in step S2007. On the other hand, if it is the high-frequency winning mode, “15” is set in the first round counter area RC1 in step S2008.

  After executing the process of step S2007 or step S2008, the opening command is set in step S2009, and after the external signal setting process is executed in step S2010, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, and the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not a special out flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the special out flag is not stored, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the third timer area T3 is “0”. If it is not “0”, the turn-off waiting time is determined. Since this means that it has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the third timer area T3 is “0”, a round display setting process is executed in step S2013.

  In the setting process of the round display, a process for notifying the type of the opening / closing execution mode based on the winning of the big hit is executed. Specifically, first, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. The address information corresponds to stop result data of either an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, a 15R probability variation jackpot result, or a normal jackpot result. Then, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display section RS displays information about the round related to the output. The contents of the number of rounds in the stop result data store information on display segments to be lit in the eight display segments R1 to R8. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2014.

  If it is determined in step S2011 that the special out flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2014 without executing the processes in steps S2012 and S2013. In other words, when the jackpot result including the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is entered and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the turn-off waiting time has elapsed after the display of the round display unit RS is erased, and then the round display unit RS In this case, the display of the content of the number of rounds corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode is started, whereas the content of the number of rounds is displayed in the round display section RS when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed as a special result. Is not set.

  In step S2014, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S2015. The processing configuration of the big prize opening / closing process is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  In the subsequent step S2016, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”, and in step S2017, it is determined whether or not the ending waiting time has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, in step S2018, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed, In step S2019, after performing the opening / closing execution mode end processing, the gaming state transition processing ends. The processing in step S2018 and the processing in step S2019 are the same as the processing in step S1315 and the processing in step S1317 in the first embodiment.

  Here, in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment, the round display end process is executed when the open / close execution mode ends, and the contents displayed on the round display unit RS are erased. However, in the present embodiment, such processing is not executed. Therefore, the display content set in the round display unit RS when the opening / closing execution mode starts is maintained even when the opening / closing execution mode ends. This state is maintained when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot winning occurs, and is maintained until the process for turning off the round display in step S2004 is executed.

  Next, the situation in the case of a special loss result and the situation in the case of a jackpot result will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. For convenience of explanation, in the following description, the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result are described as the jackpot result that is displayed in 15R, and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result are represented as the jackpot that is displayed in 2R. It is described as a result.

  At the timing t1, which is the timing after the opening / closing execution mode based on the fact that the jackpot result is 15R display, the opening / closing execution mode based on the special loss result is started. In this case, as described above, since it is the timing after the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result of 15R display, the round display section of the main display section 43 as shown in FIG. In RS, “F”, which is a display corresponding to the jackpot result which is already displayed as 15R, is displayed, and the display is continued even when the opening / closing execution mode based on the special loss result is started.

  After that, the opening standby time elapses at the timing t2, and the current opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing t3. Even in this case, the display corresponding to the jackpot result that is the 15R display in the round display portion RS is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result that becomes 2R display is started. In this case, in the situation where the waiting time for opening is measured, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the display on the round display unit RS is once erased, and the erased situation continues until the timing of t5. Thereafter, at the timing t5, the round display unit RS starts to display “2”, which is a display corresponding to the jackpot result that becomes 2R display, as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the opening standby time elapses at the timing t6, and the current opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing t7. Even in this case, the display corresponding to the jackpot result that is the 2R display in the round display portion RS is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, the opening / closing execution mode based on the special disconnection result is started. In this case, as described above, since it is the timing after the opening / closing execution mode based on the fact that the jackpot result is 2R display, the round display unit RS of the main display unit 43 already has the jackpot result that is 2R display. Corresponding display “2” is displayed, and this display is continued even when the opening / closing execution mode based on the special loss result is started.

  Thereafter, the opening standby time elapses at the timing t9, and the current opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing t10. Even in this case, the display corresponding to the jackpot result that is the 2R display in the round display portion RS is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result that becomes 2R display is started. In this case, in the situation where the waiting time for opening is measured, as shown in FIG. 37 (d), the display on the round display unit RS is once erased, and the erased situation continues until the timing t12. Thereafter, at the timing t12, the round display unit RS starts displaying “2”, which is a display corresponding to the jackpot result that is 2R display, as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the opening standby time elapses at the timing t13, and the current opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing t14. Even in this case, the display corresponding to the jackpot result that is the 2R display in the round display portion RS is continued.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, when an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained, a symbol including the number “2”, which is the number of times that the special winning opening 32a is opened, is displayed on the round display unit RS. The displayed state is maintained even after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and is also maintained in the opening / closing execution mode executed based on the result of the subsequent special failure. Thereby, even if the player sees the round display section RS, the execution of the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode corresponds to the result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, or the special outage result It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether it corresponds to what has become.

  On the other hand, in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, after the round display portion RS is once turned off, a symbol including the number “2” is displayed. Therefore, whether or not the execution of the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode as described above corresponds to an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special out-of-game result. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to be able to make a judgment while making it difficult for the person to make a judgment.

  Further, according to the present configuration, unlike the second embodiment, the symbol information displayed on the round display unit RS when a special outage result is obtained is stored in the ROM 203 of the main control device 81 in advance. This is not necessary, and the above effect can be achieved while reducing the storage capacity of the ROM 203.

  In the present embodiment, in a game time that is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a game time that is a special out-of-game result, “2”, which is the number of times that the big prize opening 32a is subsequently opened, is displayed on the result display section. It is good also as a structure by which the symbol containing a number is displayed.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the display content on the main display unit 43 in the case of a special loss result is different from that in the first embodiment. Therefore, this different configuration will be described below.

  In the first embodiment, the display content for the special outage result is set as the display in the round display unit RS of the main display unit 43. However, in the present embodiment, the display content for the special outage result is Not set. That is, when the result is a special loss result and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the setting of the display content in the round display unit RS is not actively performed. However, during the opening / closing execution mode that results in a special loss result, the number corresponding to the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened in the low-frequency winning mode is displayed on the round display portion RS.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the supply of operating power is started in the pachinko machine 10 and the process associated with the start of power supply is executed in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, in the round display unit RS, The display of “2”, which is a symbol corresponding to the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened in the low-frequency winning mode, is started. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of displays corresponding to the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened in the low-frequency winning mode is the initial display content in the round display section RS.

  Further, the gaming state transition processing in the present embodiment has a processing configuration shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  That is, in the game state transition process, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S2202, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, a round display changing process is executed in step S2204. Here, the process for changing the round display will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the process for changing the round display, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the implicit 2R probability change flag or the explicit 2R probability change flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any 2R probability change flag is stored, in step S2302, the third timer area T3 serving as the extinguishing waiting period measuring means provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 stores “ 100 "(i.e. 0.2 sec) is set. The value of the turn-off waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed. In the subsequent step S2303, after the turn-off process of the round display unit RS is executed, this change process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if no 2R probability change flag is stored, it is determined in step S2304 whether or not a special out flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the special out flag is stored, the change processing is terminated as it is.

  When the special out flag is not stored, that is, when either the 15R probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored, in step S2305, a switching process for switching the display of the round display unit RS is performed. Execute. Specifically, first, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. The address information corresponds to stop result data of either the 15R probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. Then, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display section RS displays information about the round related to the output. Thereafter, the change processing is terminated.

  In other words, when the game results in a jackpot result corresponding to the low-frequency winning mode including the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and shifts to the open / close execution mode, the contents displayed on the round display section RS are temporarily deleted. On the other hand, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode as a result of a special loss, the contents displayed on the round display part RS are not changed, and the opening / closing execution mode becomes a jackpot result corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode. When shifting to, the display on the round display section RS is switched to a display corresponding to the display. In addition, the specific time of the light-off waiting time is arbitrary, and if the manager of the game hall can recognize that the round display part RS is turned off, it is set shorter or longer than the above time. Also good.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 38), after executing the process for changing the round display in step S2204, the process for starting the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S2205. In the start process, as in the first embodiment, an opening waiting time is set for waiting for the opening in the opening / closing execution mode without starting the opening of the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32. . However, the waiting time for opening (waiting period for start) set here is set longer than the waiting time for turning off (lighting waiting period) in both the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode. Yes.

  In the following step S2206, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. If it is not the high-frequency winning mode, that is, if it is the low-frequency winning mode, “2” is set in the first round counter area RC1 of the RAM 204 in step S2207. On the other hand, if it is the high-frequency winning mode, “15” is set in the first round counter area RC1 in step S2208.

  After executing the process of step S2207 or step S2208, an opening command is set in step S2209, and after executing the external signal setting process in step S2210, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, and the process proceeds to step S2211. In step S2211, it is determined whether or not the implicit 2R probability variation flag or the explicit 2R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any 2R probability change flag is stored, it is determined in step S2212 whether or not the third timer area T3 is “0”. If not, it is turned off. Since this means that the waiting time has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the third timer area T3 is “0”, a round display setting process is executed in step S2213.

  In the round display setting process, a process for displaying the number corresponding to the number of times of opening of the large winning opening 32a in the low-frequency winning mode on the round display unit RS is executed. Specifically, first, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Note that the address information corresponds to the stop result data of either the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. Then, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2214.

  If it is determined in step S2211 that none of the 2R probability change flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S2214 without executing the processes in steps S2212 and S2213. In other words, when the 2R probability variation jackpot result including the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is entered and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the round display is performed after the turn-off waiting time has elapsed with the display of the round display portion RS being erased. In the part RS, the display corresponding to the number of times of opening of the large winning opening 32a in the low-frequency winning mode is started. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode as a special result, Display contents are maintained. In addition, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, the display is switched to the display of the symbol corresponding to the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened in the high-frequency winning mode.

  In step S2214, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the opening standby time has elapsed, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S2215. The processing configuration of the big prize opening / closing process is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  In the subsequent step S2216, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”, and in step S2217, it is determined whether or not the ending waiting time has elapsed. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S2218. The processing in step S2218 is the same as the processing in step S1315 in the first embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S2219, an initial display switching process for returning the display of the round display section RS to the initial display content is executed. Specifically, when the display of “2”, which is the number corresponding to the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened in the low-frequency winning mode, has already been performed, the display is maintained. On the other hand, when the display is not performed, the display is switched to the display.

  In a succeeding step S2220, an end process of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The process in step S2220 is the same as the process in step S1317 in the first embodiment.

  Here, in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment, the round display end process is executed when the open / close execution mode ends, and the contents displayed on the round display unit RS are erased. However, in the present embodiment, such processing is not executed. Therefore, the display content set in the round display unit RS when the opening / closing execution mode starts is maintained even when the opening / closing execution mode ends. This state is maintained when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode based on the big win is made, and is maintained until the processing for changing the round display in step S2204 is executed.

  Next, the situation in the case of a special loss result and the situation in the case of a jackpot result will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. For convenience of explanation, in the following description, the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result are described as the jackpot result that is displayed in 15R, and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result are represented as the jackpot that is displayed in 2R. It is described as a result.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the round display section RS has already displayed “2”, which is the number corresponding to the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened in the low-frequency winning mode, as the initial display content. In the situation, the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result that becomes 15R display is started at the timing of t1, and as shown in FIG. It is switched to “F” which is a display corresponding to the jackpot result.

  After that, the opening standby time elapses at the timing t2, and the current opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing t3. In this case, at the timing t3, the display on the round display unit RS is restored to “2” which is the display content of the initial setting.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the opening / closing execution mode based on the special deviation result is started. In this case, “2”, which is the display content of the initial setting, is already displayed on the round display unit RS, and the display is continued even when the opening / closing execution mode based on the special loss result is started.

  Thereafter, the opening standby time elapses at the timing t5, and the current opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing t6. Even in this case, the display of “2”, which is the initial display content in the round display section RS, is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t7, the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result that becomes 2R display is started. In this case, in the situation where the waiting time for opening is measured, as shown in FIG. 40 (d), the display on the round display unit RS is once erased, and the erased situation continues until the timing of t8. Thereafter, at the timing t8, the round display unit RS displays “2”, which is a display corresponding to the jackpot result to be 2R display (same as the initial display content), as shown in FIG. Is started.

  Thereafter, the opening standby time elapses at the timing t9, and the current opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing t10. Even in this case, the display corresponding to the jackpot result that is the 2R display in the round display portion RS is continued.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the number of times that the big winning opening 32a is opened when the initial display content in the round display section RS is an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result. The number is “2”. That is, the display state of the round display unit RS in a state where the variable winning device 32 is not opened or closed based on the fact that the lottery result of the winning / losing lottery has been won is maintained in a state where the number “2” is displayed. The Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed based on the result of the special losing result, the number “2” is displayed on the round display portion RS. Thereby, even if the player sees the round display section RS, the execution of the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode corresponds to the result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, or the special outage result It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether it corresponds to what has become.

  In particular, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed on the basis of the result of the special loss result, regardless of the timing, in the round display unit RS, the case is an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and In the case of a special losing result, a number “2”, which is the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened, is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the case of an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, after the round display portion RS is once turned off, a result display including the number “2” is displayed. Therefore, whether or not the execution of the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode as described above corresponds to an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special out-of-game result. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to be able to make a judgment while making it difficult for the person to make a judgment.

  Further, according to the present configuration, unlike the second embodiment, it is necessary to previously store the result display information of the round display unit RS in the case of a special outlier result in the ROM 203 of the main controller 81. In addition, the above effects can be achieved while reducing the storage capacity of the ROM 203.

  In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started and the display control for the round display unit RS is enabled in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, the round display unit RS has an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and In the case of a special loss result, the display of the number “2”, which is the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened, is started. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed based on the result of the special loss result, the round display unit RS is an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result regardless of the timing. And in the case of a special outage result, a number “2”, which is the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened, is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the display content of the initial setting is not limited to “2”, and corresponds to at least the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened in the low-frequency winning mode, such as “2.”. What is necessary is just the symbol which contains the information of a number in the identifiable state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in a game time that is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a game time that is a special out-of-game result, “2” that is the number of times that the special winning opening 32a is subsequently opened is displayed in the result display section. It is good also as a structure by which the symbol containing a number is displayed.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the main display unit 241 is different from that of the first embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 41A, a round display unit 242 and a result display unit 243 are provided. Yes. The round display unit 242 and the result display unit 243 are provided in a state of being separated by a predetermined interval. Among these, the result display unit 243 is provided with a first result display unit 244 and a second result display unit 245, and the first result display unit 244 and the second result display unit 245 are provided in the first implementation. Similarly to the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS in the form, a plurality of (specifically, eight) display segments are arranged in parallel so that a predetermined symbol can be displayed.

  On the other hand, the round display unit 242 is different from the round display unit RS in the first embodiment and the first result display unit 244 and the second result display unit 245 in the same shape (or substantially the same shape). And the light emission parts 246-249 of the same magnitude | size (or substantially the same magnitude | size) are arranged in parallel at equal intervals. In addition, although each light emission part 246-249 is formed so that it may become circular shape, it is not limited to this.

  The four light emitting units 246 to 249 are arranged obliquely in parallel within the range of the enclosing unit 250 that defines the outer edge of the round display unit 242. Specifically, the multiple opening / closing light emitting unit 246 is relatively upper right, the small opening / closing light emitting unit 249 is relatively lower left, and the first dummy light emitting unit 247 and the second dummy light emitting unit 248 are disposed between them. As shown, the light emitting portions 246 to 249 are arranged in parallel so as to have an upward slope. In other words, in the oblique direction, the multiple opening / closing light emitting unit 246 and the small opening / closing light emitting unit 249 are arranged so as to sandwich the first dummy light emitting unit 247 and the second dummy light emitting unit 248 therebetween.

  Among the light emitting units 246 to 249, the multi-opening / closing light emitting unit 246 arranged at the uppermost part is in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode based on the fact that the jackpot result has been obtained. It is turned on to notify that effect. In other words, it has a function of notifying that it has shifted to the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode based on the fact that the jackpot result has been reached and that it has shifted.

  Further, the small opening / closing light emitting unit 249 arranged in the lowermost part shifts to the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode based on the fact that the jackpot result such as the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is reached. It is turned on to notify that effect. In other words, it has a function of notifying that it has shifted to the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and that it has shifted based on the fact that the jackpot result has been obtained.

  On the other hand, the first dummy light emitting unit 247 and the second dummy light emitting unit 248 disposed between the multiple opening / closing light emitting unit 246 and the small opening / closing light emitting unit 249 do not have a function of notifying the gaming state, It has a function for making it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the contents of the round display. That is, the first dummy light emitting unit 247 and the second dummy light emitting unit 248 have a function as a dummy display unit.

  In the round display unit 242, a multi-opening / closing instructing unit for suggesting that the multi-opening / closing light-emitting unit 246 is a multi-opening / closing display unit for notifying that it is a high-frequency winning mode based on a big hit result. (Specifically, “15R”) is provided. The multiple opening / closing suggestion portion is attached to the round display portion 242 by printing. The multiple opening / closing suggesting portion is disposed below the multiple opening / closing light emitting portion 246 within the range of the surrounding portion 250 and beside the first dummy light emitting portion 247.

  In addition, the round display unit 242 is a small opening and closing display unit for suggesting that the small opening and closing light emitting unit 249 is a low opening and closing display unit for notifying that it is a low-frequency winning mode based on a big hit result. An suggestion (specifically, “2R”) is provided. The small opening / closing suggestion portion is attached to the round display portion 242 by printing. The small opening / closing suggesting portion is disposed below the second dummy light emitting portion 248 within the range of the surrounding portion 250 and beside the small opening / closing light emitting portion 249.

  As described above, the multiple opening / closing suggesting portion is disposed below the multiple opening / closing light emitting portion 246 which is a multiple opening / closing display portion and beside the first dummy light emitting portion 247 which is a dummy display portion. Since the small opening / closing suggesting portion is disposed below the second dummy light emitting portion 248 which is a dummy display portion and beside the small opening / closing light emitting portion 249 which is a small opening / closing display portion, For example, a multi-opening / closing display unit is a dummy, while a multi-opening / closing display unit is a dummy for a player. It can be misidentified as the first dummy light emitting unit 247 as the display unit, or can be misidentified as the small opening / closing display unit as the second dummy light emitting unit 248 as the dummy display unit.

  Each of the light emitting units 246 to 249 of the round display unit 242 is directly controlled to emit light by the main controller 81 in the same manner as the first result display unit 244 and the second result display unit 245. In this case, the contents of the light emission control are stored as stop result data in the ROM 203 of the main controller 81, and these stop result data are stored in the stop result table as the value of the big hit type counter C2 or the value of the big hit random number counter C1. It is associated.

  The stop result data will be described below with reference to FIGS. 41 (b) to 41 (d). 41 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal jackpot stop result table, FIG. 41 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a stop result table for implicit 2R probability variation, and FIG. 41 (d) is an explanatory diagram. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop result table for special removal.

  In addition, in the stop result data for 15R probability variation jackpot, the content of the specific result display is set, but the content of the round display is common to the stop result data for normal jackpot. Moreover, in the stop result data for explicit 2R probability change, although the contents of the specific result display are set, the contents of the round display are the same as those of the stop result data for implicit 2R probability change. In addition, “1” in the round display column in each stop result table in FIGS. 41B to 41D indicates the multi-opening / closing light emitting unit 246 which is the first light emitting unit from the top. “2” indicates the first dummy light emitting unit 247 that is the second light emitting unit from the top, and “3” in the round display column indicates the second dummy light emitting unit 248 that is the third light emitting unit from the top. “4” in the column indicates the small opening / closing light emitting unit 249 which is the fourth light emitting unit from the top.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (b), four types of data A, data B, data C, and data D are set as stop result data in the case of a normal jackpot result. These data A, data B, data C, and data D include the type of light emitting units 246 to 249 to be emitted in the round display unit 242, and the contents of the stop result in the first result display unit 244 or the second result display unit 245. Are set as a pair.

  In the normal jackpot stop result table, data A to data D are stopped for different numerical ranges among “0 to 9” set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the normal jackpot result. Result data is set. In this case, in any of the data A to data D, the light emitting units 246 to 249 to be emitted in the round display unit 242 include the multi-opening / closing light emitting unit 246. As a result, the game hall manager pays attention to the multi-opening / closing light emitting unit 246, so that the execution of the opening / closing execution mode related to the high-frequency winning mode has become a normal jackpot result (or 15R probability variation jackpot result). It can be confirmed that it corresponds. However, in the data B to the data D, the first dummy light emitting unit 247 and the second dummy light emitting unit 248 as dummy display units are included as light emission targets.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (c), four types of data E, data F, data G, and data H are set as stop result data in the case of an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. The data E, data F, data G, and data H include the type of light emitting units 246 to 249 to be emitted in the round display unit 242, and the contents of the stop result in the first result display unit 244 or the second result display unit 245. Are set as a pair.

  In the non-explicit 2R probability change stop result table, each of the data E for different numerical ranges among “10-14” set as the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to the implicit 2R probability change jackpot result. ~ Stop result data of data H is set. In this case, in any of the data E to data H, the light emitting units 246 to 249 to be emitted in the round display unit 242 include the light emitting unit 249 for small opening and closing. Thereby, the manager of the game hall pays attention to the small opening / closing light emitting unit 249 so that the execution of the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode is performed with the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result (or the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result). It can be confirmed that this corresponds to However, in the data E to data G, the first dummy light emitting unit 247 and the second dummy light emitting unit 248 as dummy display units are included as light emission targets.

  As shown in FIG. 41D, three types of data I, data J, and data K are set as stop result data in the case of a special outage result. The data I, data J, and data K are a pair of the types of light emitting units 246 to 249 to be emitted in the round display unit 242 and the contents of the stop result in the first result display unit 244 or the second result display unit 245. Is set.

  In the special outage stop result table, data “I” to data “K” corresponding to different numerical values among “57, 257, 557” set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the special outage result, respectively. Stop result data is set. In this case, in any of the data I to data K, the light emitting units 246 to 249 to be emitted in the round display unit 242 do not include the multi-opening / closing light emitting unit 246 and the small opening / closing light emitting unit 249. Only the first dummy light emitting part 247 or the second dummy light emitting part 248 as a dummy display part is included. In the special outage stop result table, the content of the result display is “2”, which is a number corresponding to the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened in the low-frequency winning mode.

  The content of the round display set as described above is set for each of the light emitting units 246 to 249 of the round display unit 242 when the opening / closing execution mode is started, as in the first embodiment. Is done. In this case, since the round display unit 242 is provided with a dummy display unit, a predetermined display is performed on the round display unit 242 even in the opening / closing execution mode based on the result of the special losing result. It becomes difficult to distinguish between the occurrence of a special outlier result and the occurrence of an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result.

  In particular, as described above, the arrangement position of the multiple opening / closing suggesting portion and the small opening / closing suggesting portion in the round display portion 242 may be misunderstood as the multiple opening / closing display portion being the first dummy light emitting portion 247 as a dummy display portion. Since the small opening / closing display unit is set to be misidentified as the second dummy light emitting unit 248 as the dummy display unit, the result of the special disengagement for the player also from this point It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the occurrence of a non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result.

  In addition, since the first dummy light emitting unit 247 and the second dummy light emitting unit 248 as the dummy display unit are controlled to emit light even in the opening / closing execution mode based on the result of the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the special deviation The display content of the round display unit 242 in the opening / closing execution mode based on the result is partially shared with the display content of the round display unit 242 in the opening / closing execution mode based on the result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot Can do. Also from this point, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the occurrence of a special loss result and the occurrence of an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (1) In the first embodiment, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed based on the result of the special losing result, not the round display unit RS but the result display unit (first result display unit AS). Alternatively, in the second result display section BS), information including a symbol corresponding to the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened in the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode (specifically, the number “2” is included). (Information) is displayed, but this may be changed. For example, when the display state on the main display unit 43 is the same as the case where the information displayed on the result display unit is the implicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, and the information displayed on the round display unit RS is the implicit two probability variable jackpot result As a configuration in which information including a symbol corresponding to the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened in the open / close execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode is displayed on the round display unit RS on the condition that the display state is not the same as Also good. However, from the viewpoint of allowing the game hall manager to determine well whether or not the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode is based on the result of the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, As in the first embodiment, it is preferable that the display mode in the round display unit RS is different between the case of the special outlier result and the case of the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result.

  (2) In the first embodiment, although it is configured that some information can be displayed on the round display unit RS even when a special outage result is obtained, instead of this, a special outage result is obtained. In a case where the lottery result of the success / failure lottery is a losing result including the case, the display state of the round display unit RS may be maintained in the detaching display state. Specifically, the display state for detachment may be configured to be maintained in a state in which the round display unit RS is turned off. Thereby, when the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode is executed, the game hall manager can make a good determination as to whether or not it corresponds to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. It becomes possible.

  (3) In the first embodiment, information including the number “2” is displayed as information including a symbol corresponding to the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened in the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode. However, this may be changed. For example, the symbol corresponding to the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened in the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode may be set as information including a predetermined character such as “L”. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a symbol corresponding to the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened in the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode is set as information including symbols different from alphabets and numbers such as “−”. Good. However, in terms of making it difficult for the player to determine whether the execution of the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode corresponds to the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or the special outlier result, It is preferably set as information including a number that directly indicates the number of times the winning opening 32a is opened (that is, the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed). This configuration may be applied not only to the first embodiment but also to other embodiments such as the second embodiment.

  (4) In the first embodiment, the open / close execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode is configured such that the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 does not substantially occur. A configuration in which a winning of a game ball to the winning device 32 can substantially occur may be employed. However, as described in the first embodiment, the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed based on the result of the special losing result while suppressing the influence on the game ball play rate. In addition, in the low frequency winning mode, it is preferable that the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 does not substantially occur. Note that this configuration may be applied not only to the first embodiment but also to other embodiments such as the second embodiment.

  (5) In the first embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the result of the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the result of the special loss result are the same. The opening / closing execution mode related to a certain low-frequency winning mode is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the opening / closing execution mode may be generated in substantially the same (or similar) manner.

  For example, it is good also as a structure from which the opening restriction | limiting period of one big winning opening 32a differs in both opening / closing execution modes. Specifically, the opening restriction period in the former opening / closing execution mode may be 0.20 sec, and the opening restriction period in the latter opening / closing execution mode may be 0.19 sec. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the open limit number of one big winning opening 32a is different in both opening / closing execution modes. Specifically, the opening limit number in the former opening / closing execution mode may be set to ten, and the opening limit number in the latter opening / closing execution mode may be set to six. Note that this configuration may be applied not only to the first embodiment but also to other embodiments such as the second embodiment.

  (6) In the first embodiment, it is a period in which information on the result of each game is displayed in the result display section (first result display section AS or second result display section BS) of the main display section 43. The result display period includes the entire number display period, which is a period in which information on the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed when the open / close execution mode is executed in the round display unit RS of the main display unit 43. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the information on the result of each game time in the result display unit is not continued until the start of the next game time, or the next opening / closing execution mode is started during the period in which the information on the number of times in the round display unit RS is displayed. The result display period and the number display period may be partially overlapped with each other by continuing the process until the time is reached. In addition, the result display period and the count display period overlap by making the measurement start timing and end timing of the result display period and the count display period different from those in the first embodiment. There may be no configuration.

  However, it is preferable to overlap at least a part of both periods in that the player can visually recognize the display on the result display unit and the display on the round display unit RS at the same time. In addition, in the point that the number of times that the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed in the opening / closing execution mode based on the fact that the jackpot result has been obtained is well notified to the manager of the game hall, the variation display of the pattern on the result display unit The display on the round display section RS is started after the end of the display (after the final stop display of the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41) and before the first prize opening 32a is first opened. Is preferred.

  Note that this configuration may be applied not only to the first embodiment but also to other embodiments such as the second embodiment.

  (7) The main display unit 43 is not limited to the configuration in which the round display unit RS, the first result display unit AS, and the second result display unit BS are arranged side by side in this order. The part RS, the first result display part AS, and the second result display part BS may be arranged in the vertical direction in this order. The round display part RS, the first result display part AS, and the second result display part The BS may be arranged in an oblique direction in this order. In other words, the opening / closing of the variable prize winning device 32 is the result of the unclear 2R probability variation big hit result while allowing the manager of the game hall to perform the visual recognition of the round display unit RS, the first result display unit AS, and the second result display unit BS. The round display part RS, the first result display part AS, and the second result display part make it difficult for the player to determine whether the result corresponds to the fact that the result is a special result or the result is a special outlier. In the configuration in which the BSs are arranged in the predetermined direction in this order, and the position of the first result display part AS is closer to the second result display part BS than the round display part RS, each display The juxtaposition direction of the parts RS, AS, and BS is arbitrary.

  Note that this configuration may be applied not only to the first embodiment but also to other embodiments such as the second embodiment.

  (8) In the main display unit 43, the first result display unit AS and the round display unit RS are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction, and the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS are juxtaposed in the vertical direction. Alternatively, the first result display unit AS and the round display unit RS may be arranged in the vertical direction, and the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS may be arranged in the horizontal direction. .

  In addition, the first result display unit AS and the round display unit RS may be arranged in parallel, and the second result display unit BS and the round display unit RS may be arranged in parallel. However, when the player decides whether the opening / closing of the variable prize winning device 32 corresponds to an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special loss result, In the configuration in which the first result display unit AS is attracted more attention than the two result display unit BS, the position of the first result display unit AS with respect to the round display unit RS is closer to the second result display unit BS. It is preferable that the display units RS, AS, and BS are arranged in the configuration.

  Each of the above configurations may be applied not only to the first embodiment but also to other embodiments such as the second embodiment.

  (9) The main display unit 43 is not limited to the configuration in which the round display unit RS and the first result display unit AS are arranged in parallel, and the round display unit RS and the first result display unit AS are predetermined. It is good also as a structure arrange | positioned in the position away only by this distance. However, when the player decides whether the opening / closing of the variable prize winning device 32 corresponds to an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special loss result, In the configuration in which the first result display unit AS is attracted more attention than the two result display unit BS, the position of the first result display unit AS with respect to the round display unit RS is closer to the second result display unit BS. It is preferable that the display units RS, AS, and BS are arranged in the configuration.

  Note that this configuration may be applied not only to the first embodiment but also to other embodiments such as the second embodiment.

  (10) In the main display unit 43, the first result display unit AS that can display both the result display in the case of the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the result display in the case of the special outlier result is the round display unit RS. The first result display unit is not limited to the configuration arranged in parallel, and the second result result display unit BS is disposed between the first result display unit AS and the round display unit RS. It is good also as a structure where AS and round display part RS are not arranged in parallel. Further, for example, the round display part RS may be arranged at the upper part of the game area, and the first result display part AS may be arranged at the lower part of the game area. However, in order to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable prize-winning device 32 corresponds to an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special loss result, It is preferable to arrange the first result display part AS and the round display part RS in parallel.

  In addition, instead of a configuration in which the first result display section AS and the round display section RS are configured to have a common configuration, a display section having a different configuration in the first result display section AS and the round display section RS. It may be used. For example, a segment display unit may be used as the first result display unit AS, and a liquid crystal display unit may be used as the round display unit RS. However, in order to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the opening / closing of the variable prize-winning device 32 corresponds to an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special loss result, The first result display unit AS and the round display unit RS are preferably configured by a display unit having a common configuration.

  Each of the above configurations may be applied not only to the first embodiment but also to other embodiments such as the second embodiment.

  (11) In the first embodiment, when the result is an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the result display displayed on the result display unit is the opening / closing execution mode based on the result of the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. The number “2”, which is a symbol corresponding to the value of the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened, may be displayed. However, in order to differentiate the result display in the case of an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the result display in the case of a special outlier result, the result display mode in the case of an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is changed to a special outlier result. It is necessary to make the result display different from the result display in the case of a special outlier result by adding a different color or adding other symbols to the result display in the case of. According to this configuration, when the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode is executed, it is difficult for the player to determine whether it corresponds to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or the special outlier result. It becomes possible to do.

  (12) In the first embodiment, a symbol for suggesting that the round display unit RS is a place where round display is performed, and the first result display unit AS is a lottery based on winning in the upper working port 33. A symbol for suggesting that it is a place for displaying a result, and a symbol for suggesting that the second result display unit BS is a place for displaying a result of a lottery based on winning in the lower operating port 34. It is not essential to be displayed on the main display unit 43, and these suggestion symbols may be omitted. Note that this configuration may be applied not only to the first embodiment but also to other embodiments such as the second embodiment.

  (13) In the result display in the case where the result is a special outage in the second embodiment, a number “2”, which is a symbol corresponding to the value of the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened, is displayed. However, another symbol such as “−” may be displayed. Even in this case, the result display in the case of a special outage result is a symbol corresponding to the value of the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened based on the special outage result in the round display section RS. Since the number “2” is displayed, the player who has seen the round display section RS should respond to the unclear 2R probability variable jackpot result when the big prize opening 32a is opened and closed twice. Or, it is difficult to judge whether the result corresponds to the result of special loss.

  (14) In the second embodiment, each of the round display unit RS and the result display unit is configured by a single light emitting unit (for example, an LED) that can emit light of a plurality of colors, and is unspecified 2R. The display color mode in the round display unit RS and the result display unit (for example, the first result display unit AS) corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result, and the round display unit RS and the result display unit (for example, the first display unit corresponding to the special outlier result) The display color mode in the result display section AS) may be set in reverse. Further, instead of the configuration, the round display part RS in the special outlier result sets a display color substantially the same as the result display part in the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the result display part in the special outlier result has the implicit 2R. It is good also as a structure which sets the display color substantially the same as the round display part RS in a probability variation jackpot result. Even in these cases, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the prize winning opening 32a is opened or closed twice, which corresponds to the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or the special outage result. In this way, it is possible to make a judgment for the game hall manager.

  (15) In the third embodiment, the variable winning device 32 may not be opened and closed when an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special loss result is obtained. However, the symbol display is performed in the symbol display device 41 in a common variable display mode in both cases where the result is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and a special outlier result. As a result, if the symbol display is performed in the symbol display device 41 in the above common variation display mode, it is based on the result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outlier result. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not it is based on the situation. In this configuration, a special display section is provided, and when an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained, the special display section displays the implicit 2R information, including the case of a special outlier result. Even after the game round corresponding to the implicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is finished, the display of the implicit 2R information is continued. Further, when the implicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is obtained, a special switching state is provided. It is good also as a structure which makes a display part a non-display state once. In this case, when the symbol display is performed on the symbol display device 41 in the above common variation display mode, it is determined whether the symbol is related to an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outlier result. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to make a judgment and to make it possible for a manager of a game hall to make a judgment.

  In this configuration, the special display unit may be the round display unit RS or may be another display unit. Further, instead of the symbol display device 41, a common predetermined operation may be executed instead of the common variable display mode in a movable member that is not involved in the entry of the game ball.

  (16) In the fourth embodiment, the variable winning device 32 may not be opened and closed when an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special loss result is obtained. However, the symbol display is performed in the symbol display device 41 in a common variable display mode in both cases where the result is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and a special outlier result. As a result, if the symbol display is performed in the symbol display device 41 in the above common variation display mode, it is based on the result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outlier result. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not it is based on the situation. In this configuration, a special display unit is provided, and by setting non-explicit 2R information as an initial display of the special display unit, including the case where a special out-of-game result is obtained, except for the game times that result in a jackpot result The state in which the non-explicit 2R information is displayed is maintained. Further, when the result of the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained, the special display unit may be temporarily set to the non-display state or the like as the switching state. In this case, when the symbol display is performed on the symbol display device 41 in the above common variation display mode, it is determined whether the symbol is related to an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outlier result. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to make a judgment and to make it possible for a manager of a game hall to make a judgment.

  In this configuration, the special display unit may be the round display unit RS or may be another display unit. Further, instead of the symbol display device 41, a common predetermined operation may be executed instead of the common variable display mode in a movable member that is not involved in the entry of the game ball.

  (17) In the third embodiment or the fourth embodiment, the round display unit RS is temporarily turned off as the switching state, but instead, the round display unit RS includes: A symbol including a number “2”, which is the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened, may be displayed after displaying a symbol different from the symbol displayed so far.

  (18) In the third embodiment, the round display unit RS is not composed of a plurality of segments, and symbols cannot be displayed, but a light emitting unit (for example, LED) capable of displaying a plurality of colors. It may be configured. In this case, the light emitting unit is configured to display a plurality of colors, and the display color is set according to the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened in the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result. Even in this configuration, the display color set in the opening / closing execution mode is maintained even after the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result is completed, and the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result is started For this, it is preferable to turn off the light emitting unit. As a result, it is determined for the player whether the execution of the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode corresponds to an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outlier result. It can be made difficult for the manager of the game hall to make it difficult.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the round display unit RS is not configured by a plurality of segments, and the symbol display is not possible, but the round display unit RS is configured by a light emitting unit (for example, LED) capable of displaying a plurality of colors. May be. In this case, the light emitting unit is configured to display a plurality of colors, and the display color is set according to the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened in the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result. Even in this configuration, the display color in the opening / closing execution mode based on the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the initial display color, and the opening / closing execution mode based on the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is started. The light emitting unit may be turned off. As a result, it is determined for the player whether the execution of the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode corresponds to an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outlier result. It can be made difficult for the manager of the game hall to make it difficult.

  (19) In the fourth embodiment, the initial display content in the round display section RS is that the special winning opening 32a is opened when an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special outage result is obtained. It is only necessary that the symbol includes the number “2”, which is the number of times to be displayed, and does not have to be the same as the symbol displayed on the round display unit RS when the result is an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result.

  (20) In the fourth embodiment, the initial display content in the round display unit RS does not need to be set when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started. When the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result is executed, it is set as the initial display content, and in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result is not executed, the initial setting It is good also as a structure by which display content is displayed in round display part RS.

  (21) In the fifth embodiment, the round display unit 242 is provided with the first dummy light emitting unit 247 and the second dummy light emitting unit 248 as dummy display units. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In other words, only one dummy display unit may be provided. In this case, in a configuration in which the multi-opening / closing light-emitting unit 246 and the small-opening / closing light-emitting unit 249 are arranged in an oblique direction so as to sandwich one dummy display unit, either one above or below one dummy display unit It is preferable to provide a multiple opening / closing suggestion portion and a small opening / closing suggestion portion on the other side.

  (22) In the fifth embodiment, the multiple opening / closing suggesting portion is disposed below the multiple opening / closing light emitting portion 246 and beside the first dummy light emitting portion 247, and the small opening / closing suggesting portion is However, instead of this, the multiple opening / closing suggesting portion is located beside the multiple opening / closing light emitting portion 246 and placed in the first dummy. The small opening / closing suggesting portion may be disposed on the side of the second dummy light emitting portion 248 and above the small opening / closing light emitting portion 249 while being disposed above the light emitting portion 247. Even in this case, the same effect as that of the fifth embodiment can be obtained.

  (23) In the fifth embodiment, the multiple opening / closing suggesting portion is disposed at an equidistant position with respect to both the multiple opening / closing light emitting portion 246 and the first dummy light emitting portion 247, and the small opening / closing suggesting portion. May be arranged at equidistant positions with respect to both the second dummy light emitting unit 248 and the small opening / closing light emitting unit 249.

  (24) In each of the above embodiments, only one type of operation port may be provided. In addition, in the configuration in which both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are provided, even if a game ball wins in any of the working ports 33 and 34, the holding information is stored in the same holding area and stored first. It is good also as a structure where the success / failure lottery is sequentially performed with respect to the held information. In this configuration, the main display unit 43 is provided with only one type of result display unit. Even if it is the said structure, it is preferable to arrange the said one type of result display part in parallel with round display part RS, Furthermore, it is using the same display part as the said one type of result display part and round display part RS. preferable.

  (25) The positions at which the main display units 43 and 241 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided are not limited to the positions in the above embodiments, and may be arranged on the center frame 42, for example. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which displays on the symbol display apparatus 41 the information currently displayed on the main display parts 43 and 241 in the said each embodiment, and the information currently displayed on the display part 44 for accessories.

  (26) In each of the above embodiments, the number of times that the special winning opening 32a is opened based on the result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot is not limited to two times, and the result is a special loss result. As long as it is the same as the number of times that the special winning opening 32a is opened, it is arbitrary. In addition, the big winning opening 32a is opened based on the number of times the big winning opening 32a is opened based on the result of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, or the 15R special big hit result and the normal big winning result. The number of times is also arbitrary.

  In addition, it is not essential that the reach display is generated in the game times corresponding to the special loss result or the game times corresponding to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the reach display may not be generated.

  Also, a variable winning device that is opened and closed in an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to a special outage result and an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to a 15R probability variation jackpot result, and a normal jackpot result A variable winning device that is opened and closed in the opening and closing execution mode may be provided separately.

  Further, the probability of a special failure result in the winning / losing lottery relating to the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 is different from the probability of the special winning result in the winning / failing lottery relating to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34. May be.

  Also, the type of jackpot result to be distributed when the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode and the case of the low probability mode may be different when the winning lottery wins.

  (27) In each of the above-described embodiments, the external output terminal plate 99 may be configured to be provided with only one of the jackpot signal output terminal 99a and the jackpot and special-off signal output terminal 99b. Further, in place of or in addition to the output terminals 99a and 99b, a special out signal output terminal for outputting a special out signal when a special out result is obtained may be provided. Further, in the configuration in which the special outlier signal output terminal is provided as described above, an output terminal for outputting an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot signal may be provided when an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained. In this case, it is good also as a structure which performs the display effect corresponding to the special losing result and the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result with the display device arranged in parallel with the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall.

  (28) In each of the above embodiments, in the winning lottery using the jackpot random number counter C1 in the main control device 81, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired for the lottery However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a special loss occurrence lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to make a special loss result, a special loss lottery counter and a special loss lottery table are provided, and the jackpot random number counter C1 earned for the winning lottery If the value of the special off-lottery counter acquired when it is determined that the value is not a big hit win is a value that is set as a special off-winning value in the special off-lottery table, the special off A resulting configuration may be used.

  (29) The number of reservations is not limited to a configuration in which the number of first result display area reservation areas Ra is four and the number of second result display area reservation areas Rb is four. Five or more may be sufficient, and it is good also as a structure from which both holding numbers differ.

  (30) The method of measuring each time in the above embodiment is arbitrary, and the method of counting a predetermined value using the counter area may be an addition type or a subtraction type. Further, the method of monitoring a power failure in the main controller 81 or the like is also arbitrary. The number of rounds in each opening / closing execution mode is also arbitrary.

  In addition, the configuration of the game ball for the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 or the like is not limited to the configuration of paying out the game ball directly. In the configuration having a function of storing the virtual game medium, It is good also as a structure which provides the said virtual game medium.

  Also, the symbol display device 41 may be omitted, and a lottery result such as a winning / failing lottery may be taught by a movable decorative member.

  In addition, as a support mode of the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operation port 34, a non-supportable mode in which the electric accessory 34a is not opened may be set instead of the low frequency support mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can win | win the game ball | bowl to the lower operation port 34, even if it is the condition where the electric accessory 34a is a closed state.

  In addition, the contents of the result display in the result display section AS of the main display section 43 are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the jackpot type counter C2 for a predetermined jackpot result or special outlier result. May be.

  (31) In the above embodiment, the reserved ball storage area 232 provided in the RAM 204 of the main controller 81 includes the first result display area reservation area Ra as the reservation area for the upper action opening 33, and the lower action opening. The second result display area reservation area Rb is provided as a reservation area for 34, but instead of this, the area in which the storage information can be stored is the total number of reservations of the upper operation opening 33 and the lower operation opening 34. It is good also as a structure provided with the common holding | maintenance area in which the partial area which can store the information which corresponds to which of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 is set in each area. As each area of the common reserved area, for example, each area is configured as a storage area such as 1 byte, and a predetermined bit portion of the storage area corresponds to either the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 A configuration is possible in which the information is set as a partial area that can be stored. Even in this case, the pachinko machine 10 includes the first acquisition information storage unit and the second acquisition information storage unit.

  (32) In the above embodiment, each of the big hit random number counter and the big hit type counter with the holding information related to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 33 and the holding information related to the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 34 A different counter may be used.

  (33) In the above embodiment, the lower working port 34 is provided with the electric accessory 34a. Depending on the state of the electric accessory 34a, the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 Although the difference in the ease of winning a prize has been adopted, this may be changed. For example, it may be configured such that the electric work item 34a of the lower working port 34 is not provided and the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 do not differ in the ease of winning a game ball. However, in order to positively provide a state in which a winning of a game ball to the lower working port 34 is likely to occur, it is preferable to provide an electric accessory 34a or the like in the lower working port 34.

  In addition, the configuration for switching the lower operating port 34 between the open state and the closed state is not limited to that by the electric accessory 34a, and the lower operating port 34 can be moved from the game board 24 to the game area. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a game ball can be won in the lower operation port 34 in a state protruding from the game area, and it is difficult to win a game ball in the lower operation port 34 in a state where the game ball is sunk from the game area.

  (34) In each of the above embodiments, in the situation where the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the high-frequency support mode, the result of the success / failure lottery and the distribution lottery in the main controller 81 is an unspecified 2R probability variation big hit result. In this case, although the winning / no-win lottery mode is the high probability mode, the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the high frequency support mode, but this may be changed. For example, in the situation where the frequency is the high frequency support mode, when the result is an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot, the support mode may be maintained at least until the next big win is won.

  Transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 for realizing this configuration will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the transition process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability change flag or the explicit 2R probability change flag is stored. After executing the process, the migration process is terminated. Each process of step S2402 to step S2404 is the same as each process of step S1602 to step S1604 in the above embodiments. In this case, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode is maintained at least until the next big win is won.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that both the 15R probability variation flag and the explicit 2R probability variation flag are not stored, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not the implicit 2R probability variation flag is stored. If the implicit 2R probability change flag is stored, it is determined in step S2406 whether the high frequency support flag is stored. If the high frequency support flag is not stored, step S2407 and After executing each process in step S2408, the migration process is terminated. Each process of step S2407 and step S2408 is the same as each process of step S1606 and step S1607 in the above embodiments. In this case, the support mode is maintained in the low frequency support mode.

  On the other hand, if the high-frequency support flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S2406, and after executing the processes in steps S2402 to S2404, the migration process ends. In this case, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode is maintained at least until the next big win is won.

  Steps S2409 to S2412 are the same as steps S1608 to S1611 in the above embodiments.

  In the above configuration, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is maintained even if a special outage result occurs. If the result is an implicit 2R probability variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode will be maintained until at least the next jackpot win, so there is an advantage of having an implicit 2R probability variable jackpot result. Enhanced.

  In the above configuration, an unspecified 2R probability variable jackpot result may be set as the type of jackpot result in the case of winning the jackpot based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 34. However, even in the present configuration, it is preferable that the first result display unit AS of the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS is arranged in parallel with the round display unit RS.

  In other words, since the high frequency support mode in the situation where the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, since the high probability mode is from the beginning, the opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 corresponds to the result of an unspecified 2R probability variable jackpot. There is no situation in which the player predicts whether it is a thing or a thing corresponding to the result of a special loss. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode after a normal jackpot result, the high-frequency support mode is maintained regardless of whether the result is a special loss result or an unspecified 2R probability variable jackpot result. However, the former simply maintains the previous support mode, while the latter remains at least until the next jackpot win occurs. Then, when the player confirms whether or not the high-frequency support mode is subsequently ended, whether the opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 corresponds to the result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, or the special outage result It will be possible to clearly determine whether it corresponds to what has become. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, it is predicted to the player whether the opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 corresponds to an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special loss result. The situation of letting do not occur.

  On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, the low-frequency support mode is maintained regardless of whether the result is a special outlier or the case of an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. In the situation of the low frequency support mode, the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 occurs similarly to the situation of the high frequency support mode, but the winning of the gaming ball to the lower working port 34 is difficult to occur. . Therefore, in the situation of the low frequency support mode, it is determined whether the opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 corresponds to an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result or a special failure result. When a person predicts, it is considered that the second result display unit BS is not focused and the first result display unit AS and the round display unit RS are focused.

  Due to the above circumstances, it is preferable to arrange the first result display section AS in parallel with the round display section RS among the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS.

  (35) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 41 performs a common display in the opening / closing execution mode in the case of an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and in the opening / closing execution mode in the case of a special outage result. However, a display that can be recognized as a common display may be performed. For example, while displaying the same effect image on the symbol display device 41, an area for performing blinking display or the like is set on a part of the display screen, and the display color in the blinking display is set to an unclear 2R probability variation jackpot result. The case may be different from the case of the special outlier result.

  (36) In the above embodiment, the display control device 212 is controlled by the sound lamp control device 82 based on the command output from the main control device 81, but instead, the main control device 81 is controlled. The display control device 212 may control the sound lamp control device 82 based on the command output from Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, the control devices 82 and 212 may be configured as one control device. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 is also arbitrary.

  (37) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  (38) Any combination of the characteristic configurations of the first to fifth embodiments and the configurations of the other embodiments described above, as long as the effect of satisfactorily suppressing a decrease in gaming motivation occurs. May be combined with each other.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) The front view of the operating port apparatus which shows the case where an electrically-driven accessory is a closed state, (b) The front view of an operating-port apparatus which shows the case where an electric accessory is an open state. (A) The longitudinal cross-sectional view of the area | region including the main display part and its front side, (b) The front view of the segment indicator which comprises the main display part. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a lottery lottery etc. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for low probability modes, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability modes. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 1st result display parts, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 2nd result display parts. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a holding ball storage area. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. The flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. The flowchart which shows the winning process for through. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows a data setting process. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining a stop result table for explicit 2R probability change, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a stop result table for non-explicit 2R probability change, and (c) a stop result table for 15R probability change. An explanatory diagram for explaining, (d) an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal jackpot stop result table, (e) an explanatory diagram for explaining a special outage stop result table, and (f) an ordinary out put Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a stop result table. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for probability variation big hits. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for the time of detachment. The flowchart which shows the setting process of fluctuation | variation display time. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation completion process. The flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. The flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. The flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. The flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode. The flowchart which shows the process for electronic role support. The flowchart which shows an electric utility opening / closing process. The flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process by an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. The time chart for demonstrating the mode in the case of becoming a special loss result, and the mode in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result. (A) Explanatory diagram for explaining a stop result table for implicit 2R probability change in the second embodiment, (b) Explanatory diagram for explaining a special outlier stop result table, (c) Implicit Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the main display part in 2R probability variation jackpot result and a special loss result. The flowchart which shows the game state transfer process in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the process for light extinction of a round display. The time chart for demonstrating the mode in the case of becoming a special loss result, and the mode in the case of a jackpot result. The flowchart which shows the game state transfer process in 4th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the process for a change of a round display. The time chart for demonstrating the mode in the case of becoming a special loss result, and the mode in the case of a jackpot result. (A) Explanatory diagram for explaining the main display section in the fifth embodiment, (b) Explanatory diagram for explaining a normal jackpot stop result table, (c) Unexpected 2R probability variation jackpot stop Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a result table, (d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop result table for special removal. The flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of the opening / closing execution mode in other embodiment.

Explanation of symbols

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... Variable winning device, 33 ... Upper operation port, 34 ... Lower operation port, 41 ... Symbol display device, 43 ... Main display part, 81 ... Main control device, 82 ... Sound lamp control device, 202 ... MPU, 204, RAM, 212, display control device, 241, main display unit, 242, round display unit, 246, multi-opening and closing light emitting unit as third display unit, 247, first dummy light emission as second display unit , 248... Second dummy light emitting part as second display part, 249... Small opening / closing light emitting part as first display part, AS... First result display part, RS.

Claims (9)

A lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and a lottery mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high or low Lottery means;
A gaming device provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Gaming device control means for causing the gaming device to execute a predetermined operation so that the predetermined operation mode is visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special game state winning, the game device control means performs control so that the predetermined operation is executed in the gaming device, and the lottery mode in the lottery means A first transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the first special gaming state in which is in the high probability mode;
A special display unit for displaying information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Information display control means for controlling the display of the special display unit;
With
The gaming device control means is the same as the predetermined operation in the gaming device based on the fact that a predetermined special condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning. Special gaming device control means for controlling the gaming device so as to perform an action that is recognized as
When the gaming device is controlled by the special gaming device control means, the lottery mode by the lottery means is configured to maintain the lottery mode so far,
The information display control means is configured such that the display state is a switching state in a predetermined special display situation based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state. A switching time control means for controlling the display of the special display unit so that special information is displayed after
The switching time control means indicates the state in which the special information is displayed on the special display unit based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special game state. It is maintained even after the state in which the predetermined operation is performed by the device is ended, and is maintained even when the gaming device is controlled by the special gaming device control means thereafter. A gaming machine characterized by that. A lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and a lottery mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high or low Lottery means;
Variable entry means that is provided in a game area where game balls flow down and can be switched between an open state in which the game balls flowing down are easy to enter and a closed state in which entry is difficult;
Opening / closing control means for executing opening / closing control for switching to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is in an open state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special game state winning, the number of times the variable pitching means is switched to the closed state after becoming the open state is a first predetermined number of times. A first transition means for shifting the gaming state to a first special gaming state in which the lottery mode in the lottery means is the high probability mode. ,
A switching number display unit for displaying information on the number of times of switching at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Information display control means for controlling the display of the switching number display section;
With
The opening / closing control means sets the number of times of switching to the first number of times based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning and a predetermined special condition is satisfied. Special opening / closing control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable pitching means until,
When the variable pitching means is controlled to be opened and closed by the special opening and closing control means, the lottery mode by the lottery means is configured to maintain the lottery mode until then,
The information display control means is configured so that the display state is a switching time state in a predetermined number of times display situation based on the lottery result of the lottery means being a result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state. Switching time control means for controlling the display of the switching number display unit so that the first number of times information corresponding to the first number of times is displayed,
The switching time control means is a state in which the first number of times information is displayed on the switching number display section based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state. Is maintained even after the variable pitching means is controlled to open and close until the number of times of switching becomes the first number of times, and thereafter the variable pitching means is controlled to open and close by the special opening / closing control means. A gaming machine that is maintained even in the case of a game.   When the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special game state, the switching time control means displays the switching state display section as non-display as the switching time state. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein display control is performed such that the information for the first number of times is displayed after the state that has been reached continues for a predetermined period. A lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and a lottery mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high or low Lottery means;
A gaming device provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Gaming device control means for causing the gaming device to execute a predetermined operation so that the predetermined operation mode is visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special game state winning, the game device control means performs control so that the predetermined operation is executed in the gaming device, and the lottery mode in the lottery means A first transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the first special gaming state in which is in the high probability mode;
A special display unit for displaying information corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Information display control means for controlling the display of the special display unit;
With
The gaming device control means is the same as the predetermined operation in the gaming device based on the fact that a predetermined special condition is satisfied when the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning. Special gaming device control means for controlling the gaming device so as to perform an action that is recognized as
When the gaming device is controlled by the special gaming device control means, the lottery mode by the lottery means is configured to maintain the lottery mode so far,
The information display control means includes
On the basis of the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special gaming state, the special information is obtained after the display state is changed to the switching state in a predetermined special display situation. Switching control means for controlling the display of the special display unit so that it is displayed;
The special information indicates the display state of the special display unit in a situation where the control of the gaming device by the gaming device control means based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is the special gaming state winning. Display state maintaining means for maintaining the displayed state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: A lottery for determining whether or not to generate a special gaming state is performed, and a lottery mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the special gaming state is relatively high or low Lottery means;
Variable entry means that is provided in a game area where game balls flow down and can be switched between an open state in which the game balls flowing down are easy to enter and a closed state in which entry is difficult;
Opening / closing control means for executing opening / closing control for switching to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is in an open state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special game state winning, the number of times the variable pitching means is switched to the closed state after becoming the open state is a first predetermined number of times. A first transition means for shifting the gaming state to a first special gaming state in which the lottery mode in the lottery means is the high probability mode. ,
A switching number display unit for displaying information on the number of times of switching at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine;
Information display control means for controlling the display of the switching number display section;
With
The opening / closing control means sets the number of times of switching to the first number of times based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is not the special gaming state winning and a predetermined special condition is satisfied. Special opening / closing control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable pitching means until,
When the variable pitching means is controlled to be opened and closed by the special opening and closing control means, the lottery mode by the lottery means is configured to maintain the lottery mode until then,
The information display control means includes
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the transition to the first special gaming state, in the predetermined number of times display situation, the first state after the display state becomes the switching state. Switching time control means for controlling the display of the switching number display unit so that the information for the first number of times including a symbol corresponding to the number of times is displayed;
The display state of the switching number display section in a situation where the opening / closing control of the variable pitching means by the opening / closing control means based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is the special gaming state winning is not performed. Display state maintaining means for maintaining information including a symbol corresponding to the number of times displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: As the special gaming state winning, at least a first winning and a second winning are set,
The first transition means shifts the gaming state to the first special gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first winning,
Further, based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the second winning, until the variable pitching means or the variable pitching means different from the above is the second predetermined number of times of switching. Second transition means for shifting the gaming state to a second special gaming state in which at least a second opening / closing execution state that is controlled to open / close by the opening / closing control means occurs;
6. The first opening / closing execution state is set as a state in which entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means is less likely to occur than in the second opening / closing execution state. Gaming machine. The information display control means displays the second number information corresponding to the second number in the number display situation based on the lottery result of the lotter means being the second winning. Display control of the switching number display unit,
The display state maintaining means, based on the fact that the second opening / closing execution state has ended in the situation where the second number of times information is displayed on the switching number display unit, the display state in the switching number display unit, The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the game machine is switched to a state in which information including a symbol corresponding to the first number of times is displayed.   When the power supply to the gaming machine itself is started and the display control for the switching number display unit becomes possible, the display state maintaining unit corresponds the display state in the switching number display unit to the first number. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 5 to 7, wherein the gaming machine is set to information including a symbol.   When the lottery result of the lottery means is a result corresponding to the transition to the first special game state, the switching time control means displays the switching state display section as non-display as the switching time state. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 5 to 8, wherein display control is performed so that the information for the first number of times is displayed after the predetermined state has continued for a predetermined period.

Images